WO2018211704A1 - Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system - Google Patents
Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2018211704A1 WO2018211704A1 PCT/JP2017/018894 JP2017018894W WO2018211704A1 WO 2018211704 A1 WO2018211704 A1 WO 2018211704A1 JP 2017018894 W JP2017018894 W JP 2017018894W WO 2018211704 A1 WO2018211704 A1 WO 2018211704A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- speckle
- modulator
- illumination
- mod
- speckle modulator
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 title claims description 175
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 53
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 claims description 265
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 122
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 claims description 111
- 239000013307 optical fiber Substances 0.000 claims description 100
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 93
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 claims description 93
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 claims description 20
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 111
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 38
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 21
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 21
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 21
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 17
- 230000001603 reducing effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 210000001525 retina Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009738 saturating Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012935 Averaging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150047304 TMOD1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009429 electrical wiring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/011—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour in optical waveguides, not otherwise provided for in this subclass
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/00002—Operational features of endoscopes
- A61B1/00043—Operational features of endoscopes provided with output arrangements
- A61B1/00045—Display arrangement
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/04—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor combined with photographic or television appliances
- A61B1/044—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor combined with photographic or television appliances for absorption imaging
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/063—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements for monochromatic or narrow-band illumination
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/0655—Control therefor
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/0661—Endoscope light sources
- A61B1/0669—Endoscope light sources at proximal end of an endoscope
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
- A61B1/00—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor
- A61B1/06—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements
- A61B1/07—Instruments for performing medical examinations of the interior of cavities or tubes of the body by visual or photographical inspection, e.g. endoscopes; Illuminating arrangements therefor with illuminating arrangements using light-conductive means, e.g. optical fibres
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N21/00—Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
- G01N21/84—Systems specially adapted for particular applications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B21/00—Microscopes
- G02B21/06—Means for illuminating specimens
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B21/00—Microscopes
- G02B21/36—Microscopes arranged for photographic purposes or projection purposes or digital imaging or video purposes including associated control and data processing arrangements
- G02B21/365—Control or image processing arrangements for digital or video microscopes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B23/00—Telescopes, e.g. binoculars; Periscopes; Instruments for viewing the inside of hollow bodies; Viewfinders; Optical aiming or sighting devices
- G02B23/24—Instruments or systems for viewing the inside of hollow bodies, e.g. fibrescopes
- G02B23/2407—Optical details
- G02B23/2461—Illumination
- G02B23/2469—Illumination using optical fibres
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B23/00—Telescopes, e.g. binoculars; Periscopes; Instruments for viewing the inside of hollow bodies; Viewfinders; Optical aiming or sighting devices
- G02B23/24—Instruments or systems for viewing the inside of hollow bodies, e.g. fibrescopes
- G02B23/2476—Non-optical details, e.g. housings, mountings, supports
- G02B23/2484—Arrangements in relation to a camera or imaging device
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
- G02B27/48—Laser speckle optics
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/50—Constructional details
- H04N23/555—Constructional details for picking-up images in sites, inaccessible due to their dimensions or hazardous conditions, e.g. endoscopes or borescopes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/56—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof provided with illuminating means
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/80—Camera processing pipelines; Components thereof
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a lighting device using coherent light.
- speckle noise a fine speckle pattern occurs on the imaging surface of the imager, and the acquired image It is known that it appears as noise (this is called speckle noise) and hinders visibility.
- This phenomenon is not limited to electronic imaging systems, but also occurs on the retina of the living body corresponding to the imaging surface, so the same problem occurs with illumination devices that use coherent light for illumination, such as laser projectors. To do.
- the cause of this speckle is known to be that light scattered from the unevenness of the observation object interferes and a fine light-dark pattern is formed on the imaging surface or the retina.
- speckle reduction methods are known to reduce this, and typical ones are listed below.
- speckle reduction methods are known to reduce this, and typical ones are listed below.
- coherent light is often described as “laser light” as a representative example, but in this specification, it can be read as general “coherent light”.
- the general “coherent light” also includes “partial coherent light”.
- (2-b) in a configuration in which laser light is guided by an optical fiber and irradiated, the shape and stress of the optical fiber are changed, and the temporal light guide mode is changed to change the laser light to be irradiated.
- a method for causing a phase change and changing a speckle pattern has been proposed.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-156698 discloses a laser light source device having such a configuration.
- laser light emitted from the laser light source enters the incident end of the optical fiber, and is emitted from the emission end as laser illumination light.
- An excitation device that applies vibration to the optical fiber is provided at an intermediate portion of the optical fiber.
- a light phase change occurs due to laser beam mode conversion or the like inside the optical fiber.
- the stripe pattern due to speckles generated when the observation target is irradiated from the optical fiber moves or changes. Because this speckle stripe pattern moves or changes at a speed that human eyes cannot perceive, humans feel that the speckle stripe pattern is superimposed and averaged, Speckle noise will be reduced.
- the above-mentioned method (1-a) is limited to the LD as a laser that can be used.
- the spread of the spectrum differs depending on the individual difference of the LD, and a stable and sufficient effect for reducing speckles cannot always be obtained.
- the methods (1-b) and (1-c) require a laser integrated with a special function, and the method (1-d) requires a large number of lasers and has a sufficient reduction effect. In order to realize an imaging system that exhibits it, it must be expensive.
- the method (2-a) is limited to a case where the observation target may be finely oscillated like a projector screen, it is difficult to apply to the observation target such as a microscope or an endoscope.
- the method (2-b) is a method that does not limit the observation target because it is not necessary to vibrate the observation target.
- the modulation speed since it is necessary to mechanically change the shape and stress of the optical fiber, There are significant restrictions on the modulation speed. Therefore, with this technique, for example, in an electronic imaging system, it is predicted that the speckle pattern overlapping effect cannot be sufficiently exhibited when the imaging frame rate is fast or when the imaging time is short.
- An object of the present invention is to provide an illumination device that can stably and effectively reduce speckle noise.
- An illumination device includes an illumination pulse generator that generates an illumination pulse of coherent light, a speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light, a pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, and the speckle. It has a synchronous controller that controls the drive timing of the modulator in synchronization.
- FIG. 1A shows a speckle modulator composed of a vibration device that vibrates an optical fiber.
- FIG. 1B shows that the phase and mode of the laser light in the optical fiber are changed temporally and the speckle pattern is changed temporally due to the vibration of the optical fiber.
- FIG. 1C shows the results of experiments actually conducted by the present inventors, and shows the results of measuring changes in effective speckle contrast with respect to the vibration amplitude X mod, 0 of the optical fiber.
- FIG. 2A shows a spectrum of laser light whose wavelength is temporally changed with a fluctuation width ⁇ mod .
- FIG. 2B shows a one-dimensional light intensity distribution of a speckle pattern corresponding to the wavelength fluctuation width ⁇ mod of the laser light shown in FIG. 2A.
- FIG. 1A shows a speckle modulator composed of a vibration device that vibrates an optical fiber.
- FIG. 1B shows that the phase and mode of the laser light in the optical fiber are changed temporally and the speckle pattern is changed temporally
- FIG. 2C shows the change in effective speckle contrast with respect to the change width ⁇ mod, 0 of the fluctuation width of the wavelength of the laser beam.
- FIG. 3A1 shows the speckle modulator drive waveform, the illumination waveform of the illumination pulse generator that is optimally synchronized with the drive waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reduction effect as an index of the speckle reduction effect.
- the pulse width of the irradiation waveform is shorter than a half of the modulation period of the speckle modulator, and M 0 ⁇ 1.
- 3A2 shows the speckle modulator drive waveform, the illumination waveform of the illumination pulse generator that is optimally synchronized with the drive waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reduction effect that are indicators of the speckle reduction effect.
- the pulse width of the irradiation waveform is equal to a half of the modulation period of the speckle modulator, and M 0 ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 3B1 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination waveform of the illumination pulse generator that is optimally synchronized with the driving waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reducing effect as an index of the speckle reducing effect.
- 3C1 shows the speckle modulator drive waveform, the illumination waveform of the illumination pulse generator that is optimally synchronized with the drive waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reduction effect as an index of the speckle reduction effect.
- FIG. 3C2 shows the driving waveform of the speckle modulator, the irradiation waveform of the illumination pulse generator that is optimally synchronized with the driving waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reduction effect as an index of the speckle reduction effect.
- FIG. 4A1 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- the modulation amplitude factor M 0 1 and t mod / 2M 0 > t pw, ill are shown.
- FIG. 4A1 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- the modulation amplitude factor M 0 1 and t mod / 2M 0 > t pw, ill are shown.
- FIG. 4A2 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- the modulation amplitude factor M 0 2> 1 and t mod / 2M 0 > t pw, ill are shown.
- FIG. 4B1 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- FIG. 4B2 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- FIG. 4B2 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- FIG. 4C1 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- FIG. 4C2 shows the speckle modulator driving waveform, the illumination pulse generator irradiation waveform, the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect, and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the elapsed time.
- FIG. 5 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including the imaging system according to the first embodiment.
- FIG. 6A schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristics of laser light guided by the first optical fiber by vibrating the first optical fiber.
- FIG. 6B schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber by rotating the first optical fiber.
- FIG. 6C schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the refractive index of the optical path between the collimating lens and the second fiber coupling lens.
- FIG. 6A schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristics of laser light guided by vibrating the first optical fiber.
- FIG. 6B schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber by rotating the first optical fiber.
- FIG. 6C schematically shows a configuration
- FIG. 6D schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the optical path length of the optical path between the collimating lens and the second fiber coupling lens.
- FIG. 7 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including an imaging system according to the second embodiment.
- FIG. 8A shows an irradiation waveform of an illumination pulse generator, a driving waveform of a speckle modulator, and an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of a speckle reduction effect in a single pulse type pulse width modulation method.
- FIG. 8A shows an irradiation waveform of an illumination pulse generator, a driving waveform of a speckle modulator, and an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff as an index of a speckle reduction effect in a single pulse type pulse width modulation method.
- FIG. 8B shows the irradiation waveform of the illumination pulse generator, the driving waveform of the speckle modulator, and the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff that serves as an index of the speckle reduction effect in the multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation method.
- FIG. 9A schematically shows a speckle modulator configured by combining the same two modulators.
- FIG. 9B schematically shows a speckle modulator configured by combining two modulators having different driving mechanisms but the same optical principle.
- FIG. 9C schematically shows a speckle modulator configured by combining two modulators having different optical principles.
- FIG. 10 schematically shows the overall configuration of the illumination apparatus according to the fourth embodiment.
- FIG. 11 schematically shows the overall configuration of a microscope system including an imaging system according to the fifth embodiment.
- the magnitude of the speckle modulator driving for causing the modulation of various optical characteristics to obtain the above speckle reduction is defined as “the driving strength of the speckle modulator” and is described as I mod .
- the drive intensity of speckle modulator the drive intensity of the laser wavelength modulation circuit for causing the effective optical spectrum width expansion or reduction or optical wavelength shift of the laser, observation from the light source
- the driving intensity of the phase modulator to cause the change of the phase of the light arranged in the middle of the optical path guided to the target
- it means the driving strength of a vibration device that generates a mechanical bending change of the optical fiber, the driving strength of a stress application device that changes the stress applied to the optical fiber, the driving strength of a rotating device that generates twisting of the optical fiber, and the like.
- FIG. 1A to 1C illustrate a speckle reduction mechanism by mechanically vibrating an optical fiber in the optical path of laser light from a laser light source to an observation target.
- FIG. 1A shows a speckle modulator composed of a vibration device that vibrates an optical fiber.
- a vibration motor MT is installed on a fixing member (not shown) via a damper DP that absorbs vibration.
- a weight having a center of gravity which is asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis is attached to the rotation axis of the vibration motor MT.
- An abutting member TP is fixed to the vibration motor MT.
- the abutting member TP is in contact with the optical fiber FB.
- the vibration motor MT vibrates. This vibration is transmitted to the optical fiber FB via the abutting member TP.
- the optical fiber FB is vibrated.
- the phase and mode of the laser light in the optical fiber FB can be changed with time, and the speckle pattern can be changed with time (FIG. 1B).
- the image formed on the imaging surface is observed by overlapping speckle patterns that change over time, so the speckle patterns are averaged and effective on the imaging surface. Speckle noise can be reduced.
- FIG. 1B when the change (or movement amount) of the speckle pattern within the imaging time is sufficiently large and the superposition of the speckle pattern within the imaging time can be regarded as being sufficiently averaged, the vibration is further increased. Even if the amplitude is increased, the speckle reduction effect due to the time average overlap of speckle patterns is considered to be saturated.
- FIG. 1C shows a result of an experiment actually conducted by the present inventors. Specifically, FIG. 1C shows a result of measuring an effective speckle contrast change with respect to the vibration amplitude X mod, 0 of the optical fiber. Yes. Consistent with what was predicted in connection with FIG. 1B, the vibration amplitude becomes maximum at a certain threshold value ⁇ X mod, th , and the speckle reduction effect is hardly changed even when the amplitude is increased. Is obtained. In this experiment, speckle contrast is evaluated when imaging is performed with a long imaging time so that the speckle pattern is sufficiently overlapped within the imaging time.
- FIG. 2A shows a spectrum of laser light whose wavelength is temporally changed with a fluctuation width ⁇ mod .
- FIG. 2B shows a one-dimensional light intensity distribution of a speckle pattern corresponding to the wavelength fluctuation width ⁇ mod of the laser light shown in FIG. 2A.
- FIG. 2C shows the change in effective speckle contrast with respect to the change width ⁇ mod, 0 of the fluctuation width of the wavelength of the laser beam.
- the fluctuation width ⁇ mod of the wavelength of the laser light is increased, the light intensity distribution resulting from the speckle phenomenon is reduced (that is, the speckle contrast is reduced).
- the wavelength of the laser light is modulated and the wavelength range of the integrated light appears to expand, effectively reducing the coherence of the laser light. It corresponds to that.
- the threshold ⁇ mod, th corresponding to the wavelength change width for saturating the speckle reduction effect is determined by the resolution of the imaging optical system and imager. The reduction effect hardly changes, as in the case of FIGS. 1A to 1C.
- the speckle modulator drive is used regardless of the speckle modulator for reducing speckle noise.
- the intensity is I mod
- the drive intensity amplitude is I mod, 0,
- the time period when the speckle modulator is periodically driven is the speckle modulation period t mod .
- the speckle modulator drive strength threshold width ⁇ I mod, th is defined as the width of the drive strength corresponding to the condition that the speckle reduction effect is saturated at a drive strength higher than that.
- ⁇ I mod be the change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator corresponding to the exposure period of the imager within the imaging frame time.
- the light amount adjustment by PWM may be performed by limiting the exposure period (or light accumulation period) tpw, exp of the imager.
- the change width of the drive intensity during the exposure period tpw, exp becomes ⁇ I mod
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator is set to the drive intensity threshold width ⁇ I of the speckle modulator.
- a value normalized by mod, th is defined as a modulation amplitude factor M 0
- a change width ⁇ I mod of the speckle modulator drive intensity is defined as ⁇ I mod, th as an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff .
- the speckle modulator is driven at a sufficiently fast cycle with respect to the exposure period t ON of the imager within one imaging frame or the pulse emission period t pw, ill of the light source.
- the imaging timing of the imager, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the irradiation timing of the laser beam are optimally synchronized, when the change width ⁇ I mod of the driving strength of the speckle modulator is increased, ⁇ I mod becomes ⁇ I Until it becomes mod, th , the speckle reduction effect increases monotonously and saturates in the vicinity where ⁇ I mod becomes ⁇ I mod, th .
- the speckle reduction effect increases monotonously with M eff , and a single speckle reduction mechanism Is operated, it is considered that the speckle reduction effect is almost saturated when M eff ⁇ 1.
- the driving strength threshold width ⁇ I mod, th is 0.1 mm as a displacement in vibration of a light guide member changing device (described later) that mechanically changes the optical fiber as the light guide member.
- the driving strength threshold width ⁇ I mod, th is 10 ° when the optical fiber to be described later is twisted
- the driving strength amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more when the optical fiber is twisted. It is desirable to be.
- a change corresponding to one wavelength (2 ⁇ in phase) passes through the refractive index modulator.
- This is considered to correspond to the drive strength threshold width ⁇ I mod, th . That is, if the optical wavelength is ⁇ , the length on the optical axis of the refractive index modulator is Lm, the refractive index is n, and the amount of change in the refractive index is ⁇ n, modulation can be performed with Lm ⁇ ⁇ n / n / ⁇ c ⁇ 1. desirable.
- the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm
- the change in refractive index is ⁇ n / n
- the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is ⁇ c
- the speckle modulator driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is refracted. It is desirable that ⁇ n / n ⁇ ⁇ c / Lm as the refractive index change of the refractive index modulator.
- ⁇ I mod Drive strength of speckle modulator>
- the drive intensity of the laser wavelength modulation circuit for expanding the effective optical spectrum width of the laser or shifting the optical wavelength, and the optical phase arranged in the middle of the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target It means the driving strength of the modulator, the mechanical bending strength, applied stress strength, bending strength, etc. for changing the optical phase on the optical path when an optical fiber is used as the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target.
- ⁇ I mod, 0 Drive strength amplitude of speckle modulator>
- the maximum value of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is set to I mod
- max the minimum value is set to I mod.
- ⁇ T mod speckle modulation period> This is the time period when the speckle modulator is driven periodically.
- ⁇ I mod Width of change in driving strength of speckle modulator>
- the width of change in the driving intensity of the speckle modulator within the exposure period of the imager (or within the light accumulation period of the imager) within one imaging frame is used.
- the change width of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is within a time period that is considered to be a response time to an image change of a living body (33 msec if the living body is a human).
- ⁇ I mod, th Drive strength threshold width of speckle modulator> This is the range of change in drive strength for saturating the speckle reduction effect when the drive strength of the speckle modulator is increased.
- M eff ⁇ I mod / ⁇ I mod, th Since M eff has a positive correlation with the speckle reduction effect, this can be used as an index of the speckle reduction effect. In the case of operating a single speckle reduction mechanism, the speckle reduction effect is almost saturated when M eff ⁇ 1.
- FIG. 3A1 and 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2 are “the speckle modulator driving amplitude”, “M eff and speckle reduction effect” with respect to the above-described imaging, illumination, and modulation timings.
- the upper part shows the driving waveform of the speckle modulator with respect to the elapsed time
- the middle part shows the illumination pulse optimally synchronized with this.
- the irradiation waveform of the generator is shown on the time axis
- the lower part shows M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the central time of the irradiation timing of the illumination pulse generator.
- M eff corresponds to the integrated value of the irradiation waveform at the central time of the irradiation timing.
- FIG. 3A1 and Figure 3B1 and Figure 3C1 the pulse width (or pulse emission period) of the irradiation waveform t pw, if ill is shorter than half the period of the modulation period of the speckle modulator (t mod / 2> t pw , Ill)
- the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is proportional to the reciprocal of the speckle contrast, and the speckle reduction effect by the speckle modulator is maximum. It is shown normalized by speckle contrast. Therefore, the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is plotted so as to be 1 under the condition that the reduction effect by the speckle modulator is saturated and maximized.
- the exposure timing of the imager is preferably synchronized with the irradiation timing, and the exposure period needs to include at least a part of the irradiation period, preferably all. (It is not always necessary to synchronize. For example , if there is a relationship in which there are a plurality of irradiation pulses between tpw and exp, a speckle reduction effect can be obtained even if they are not synchronized.)
- FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2 The same can be said for FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG.
- FIG. 3A1 and FIG. 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2 are summarized as follows.
- ⁇ M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of the speckle modulator so as to increase the M eff speckle reduction effect is enhanced monotonous.
- the speckle reduction effect is maximized when the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator are synchronized so that the change width ⁇ I mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is increased.
- M eff ⁇ 1 the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation.
- the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
- the illumination timing means the temporal timing of the pulse emission period generated by the illumination pulse generator
- the imaging timing means the light reception timing of the imager within one imaging frame.
- the imaging timing is set as the master time, and the illumination timing and speckle are used as the master time.
- a method of synchronizing the modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing 2) A method of synchronizing an imaging timing and a speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing with the illumination timing as a master time, and 3) A speckle modulator A method of synchronizing the driving timing as the master time with the imaging timing and the speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing.
- the system clock of the illumination device or the imaging system as the master time, and the imaging timing. Timing, the timing of the illumination, and a method for synchronizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator is a method diverse synchronization can be applied.
- the imaging cycle (frame rate) 1 / f r , the illumination pulse generation cycle t p , and the speckle modulator drive cycle t mod are not necessarily the same as long as they can be synchronized.
- FIG. 4A1 and Figure 4A2 illustrate the imaging described above, the illumination, the modulation amplitude factor M 0 of the timing and speckle modulator of the modulation as a parameter, a modulation rate of "speckle modulator
- FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2 illustrate the relationship between “M eff and speckle reduction effect”.
- FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2 illustrate a case where the modulation rate of the speckle modulator is relatively slow and t mod / 2M 0 > t pw, ill .
- the value of the speckle reduction effect is proportional to the reciprocal of the speckle contrast, and the speckle reduction effect by the speckle modulator is maximum. It is shown normalized by speckle contrast. Therefore, the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is plotted so as to be 1 under the condition that the reduction effect by the speckle modulator is saturated and maximized.
- FIG. 4A1 and 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG. 4C2 are summarized as follows. Even when t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill , the speckle reduction effect can be most efficiently brought out by synchronizing the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator. However, when M eff ⁇ 1, it cannot be reduced as the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
- the speckle modulator driving cycle t mod and timing are greatly affected by the speckle reduction effect by the pulse emission period tpw, ill and its timing in the lighting device.
- the speckle reduction effect is greatly affected by the exposure period tpw, exp and the timing of the speckle modulator driving cycle t mod and timing.
- the pulse emission period is all established even if it is read as either the pulse emission period or the exposure period tpw, exp of the imager or their overlapping portions.
- FIG. 5 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including the imaging system according to the first embodiment.
- the endoscope system 300 includes an endoscope scope unit 310 and an endoscope controller unit 320.
- the endoscope scope unit 310 and the endoscope controller unit 320 are connected by a scope unit connector 312 and a controller unit connector 322.
- the imaging system 100 includes the illumination device 102 that illuminates the observation target 190 and the imaging device 104 that captures the observation target 190 illuminated by the illumination device 102.
- the scope connector 312 and the controller connector 322 that connect the endoscope scope unit 310 and the endoscope controller unit 320 are depicted as one piece, but the endoscope scope unit 310 side of the illumination device 102 is illustrated.
- the endoscope controller unit 320 side, and the endoscope scope unit 310 side and the endoscope controller unit 320 side of the imaging device 104 may be connected by separate connectors.
- the illuminating device 102 includes an illumination light generator 110 that generates illumination light of coherent light, a light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a light guide by the light guide optical system 120.
- a light distribution optical system 140 that adjusts and emits the light distribution of the coherent light that is generated is provided.
- the illumination light generator 110 includes a laser light source 112 that emits laser light that is coherent light, and a driver 114 that drives the laser light source 112.
- the illumination light generator 110 includes an illumination pulse generator that generates illumination pulses of a predetermined pulse emission period tpw, ill of coherent light. In the following description, it is assumed that the illumination light generator 110 is composed of an illumination pulse generator unless otherwise specified.
- the light guide optical system 120 includes a first optical fiber 124 and a second optical fiber 130 as light guide members for guiding coherent light.
- the light guide member is not limited to an optical fiber, and instead, for example, a flexible waveguide may be applied.
- the light guiding optical system 120 also includes a first fiber coupling lens 122 that couples coherent light emitted from the laser light source 112 to the optical fiber 124, and a collimating lens 126 that collimates the light beam emitted from the first optical fiber 124.
- a second fiber coupling lens 128 for coupling the light beam collimated by the collimating lens 126 to the second optical fiber 130 is provided.
- the first fiber coupling lens 122, the collimating lens 126, and the second fiber coupling lens 128 are schematically depicted as one lens in FIG. 5, they are actually composed of one lens. Alternatively, it may be composed of a plurality of lenses.
- the imaging device 104 includes an imager 150 that captures images in predetermined exposure periods tpw and exp , an image processing circuit 160 that performs necessary image processing on image information acquired by the imager 150, and an image that is processed by the image processing circuit 160.
- a display 170 is provided for displaying the processed image.
- the laser light emitted from the laser light source 112 is condensed by the first fiber coupling lens 122, enters the first optical fiber 124, and is guided by the first optical fiber 124.
- the beam of laser light emitted from the first optical fiber 124 is converted into a parallel light beam by the collimating lens 126 and propagates in the space, and is collected by the second fiber coupling lens 128 and condensed by the second optical fiber 130. And is guided by the second optical fiber 130.
- the laser light guided by the light guide optical system 120 is emitted after the light distribution is adjusted by the light distribution optical system 140.
- the light L1 emitted from the light distribution optical system 140 is applied to the observation object 190.
- the light L1 irradiated to the observation object 190 is reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190.
- a part L 2 of the light reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190 enters the imager 150.
- the imager 150 acquires image information of the observation object 190 based on the light L2 received from the observation object 190.
- the image information acquired by the imager 150 is displayed on the display 170 after image processing is performed by the image processing circuit 160.
- speckles are generated on the imaging surface of the imager and appear as speckle noise in the acquired image.
- This phenomenon is not limited to an electronic imaging system, but also occurs on the retina of a living body corresponding to the imaging surface, and the same problem occurs in an illumination device using coherent light.
- the cause of speckle is that light scattered from the unevenness of the observation target interferes, and a fine light-dark pattern is formed on the imaging surface and the retina.
- the illumination device 102 includes a speckle modulator 200 that modulates speckle generated by coherent light.
- the speckle modulator 200 may be configured by, for example, a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristics of coherent light guided by the light guide optical system 120. Or the speckle modulator 200 may be comprised with the wavelength modulator which changes the optical characteristic of coherent light.
- the light guide characteristic modulator may be composed of a phase modulator that temporally changes the phase of coherent light guided by the light guide optical system 120, for example.
- the phase modulator may include a light guide member changing device that mechanically changes the light guide member included in the light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light.
- the mechanical variation applied to the light guide member may be, for example, vibration, rotation, or twist.
- the phase modulator may be configured by a refractive index modulator that temporally changes the refractive index of a part of the light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light.
- the refractive index modulator may include, for example, an electro-optic element or an acousto-optic element.
- the phase modulator may also include a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light, for example.
- the phase modulator may be composed of a wavelength modulator that temporally changes the wavelength of coherent light emitted from the illumination light generator 110.
- the speckle modulator 200 includes a first light guide characteristic modulator 210 disposed at an intermediate portion between both ends of the first optical fiber 124, and between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128.
- the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam.
- the speckle modulator 200 also includes a wavelength modulator 230 that temporally changes the wavelength of the laser light emitted from the laser light source 112.
- the wavelength modulator 230 includes a wavelength-variable laser light source 112 and a wavelength modulation circuit 232 that controls the laser light source 112 so as to temporally change the wavelength of the laser light emitted from the laser light source 112.
- the configurations of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210 and the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D.
- the speckle modulator 200 does not necessarily need to include all of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and the wavelength modulator 230, and may include at least one of them.
- the illumination device 102 also includes a synchronization controller 240 that controls the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 by synchronizing the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200.
- the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the drive timing of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210 and / or the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 in synchronization.
- the synchronization controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110, the speckle modulator 200, and the imager 150 by synchronizing the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150. It is also possible.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination timing. It is provided in order to optimize the timing of imaging and increase M eff so that the speckle reduction effect can be sufficiently obtained.
- the illumination timing means the temporal timing of the pulse emission period generated by the illumination light generator 110
- the imaging timing means the light reception timing of the imager 150 within one imaging frame. To do.
- the imaging timing is set as the master time, and the illumination timing and speckle are used as the master time.
- a method of synchronizing the modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing 2) A method of synchronizing an imaging timing and a speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing with the illumination timing as a master time, and 3) A speckle modulator A method of synchronizing the driving timing as the master time with the imaging timing and the speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing.
- the system clock of the illumination device or the imaging system as the master time, and the imaging timing. Timing, the timing of the illumination, and a method for synchronizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator is a method diverse synchronization can be applied.
- the imaging cycle (frame rate) 1 / f r , the illumination pulse generation cycle t p , and the speckle modulator drive cycle t mod are not necessarily the same as long as they can be synchronized.
- n is a natural number
- t p 2n ⁇ t mod
- the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff can be defined as the end point of the last illumination pulse from the start point of the next illumination pulse with the widest pulse interval.
- the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff can be said to be a period from the lighting time of the first illumination pulse to the extinguishing time of the last illumination pulse in one illumination pulse group.
- FIG. 6A, FIG. 6B, FIG. 6C, and FIG. 6D show a configuration example of a light guide characteristic modulator that functions as a speckle modulator.
- FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show the structural example of the 1st light guide characteristic modulator 210 arrange
- FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D show the collimating lens 126 and the 2nd fiber coupling lens.
- positioned on the optical path between 128 is shown.
- FIG. 6A schematically shows the configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 210A that changes the optical characteristics of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 by vibrating the first optical fiber 124.
- the light guide characteristic modulator 210A includes a light guide member changing device 2110 that mechanically changes the first optical fiber 124 that guides laser light, and a driver 2130 that drives the light guide member changing device 2110.
- the light guide member fluctuation device 2110 is an optical fiber vibration device that applies vibration to the first optical fiber 124.
- the light guide member varying device 2110 has a vibration motor 2112.
- the vibration motor 2112 is installed on a damper 2118 that absorbs vibration.
- the damper 2118 is installed on a fixing member (not shown).
- a weight 2116 having a center of gravity asymmetric with respect to the rotation shaft 2114 is attached to the rotation shaft 2114 of the vibration motor 2112.
- An abutting member 2120 is fixed to the vibration motor 2112.
- the abutting member 2120 is in contact with the first optical fiber 124.
- the vibration motor 2112 When the vibration motor 2112 is supplied with a current from the driver 2130 via the electric wiring 2140, the rotation shaft 2114 rotates. Since the weight 2116 having an asymmetric center of gravity is attached to the rotation shaft 2114, the vibration motor 2112 vibrates when the rotation shaft 2114 rotates. This vibration is transmitted to the optical fiber 124 via the butting member 2120. As a result, the first optical fiber 124 is vibrated. Thereby, since the bending of the first optical fiber 124 changes periodically, the phase and mode of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 change with time.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210A is equal to the first optical fiber 124 by the light guide member fluctuation device 2110.
- the vibration displacement is 5 ⁇ c or more.
- the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210A is increased by increasing the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 to increase the vibration amplitude X mod, 0 by utilizing the increase in centrifugal force. It can be enlarged.
- the weight 2116 is attached around the rotation shaft 2114 of the vibration motor 2112 via an elastic member, the weight 2116 increases the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 and the asymmetry of the center of gravity of the weight 2116 with respect to the rotation shaft 2114. Is configured to increase. For this reason, when the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 is increased, the vibration amplitude further increases.
- FIG. 6B schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 210B that changes the optical characteristics of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 by rotating the first optical fiber 124.
- the light guide characteristic modulator 210B includes a light guide member fluctuation device 2150 that applies mechanical fluctuations to the first optical fiber 124 that guides laser light, and a driver 2170 that drives the light guide member fluctuation device 2150.
- the light guide member fluctuation device 2150 is an optical fiber rotation device that applies reciprocal rotation to the first optical fiber 124.
- the light guide member varying device 2150 has a rotation motor 2152.
- the rotary motor 2152 is installed on a fixing member (not shown).
- a gear 2156 is attached to the rotary shaft 2154 of the rotary motor 2152.
- the gear 2156 meshes with a gear 2158 fixed to the first optical fiber 124.
- the rotation shaft 2154 reciprocally rotates clockwise and counterclockwise periodically within a predetermined angle range.
- This reciprocating rotational motion is transmitted to the gear 2158 fixed to the first optical fiber 124 via the gear 2156.
- the first optical fiber 124 is reciprocally rotated.
- the twist around the axis of the first optical fiber 124 changes periodically, so that the phase and mode of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 change with time.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210B is preferably 10 ° or more in terms of an angle at which the first optical fiber 124 is twisted.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210B can be increased by increasing the reciprocal rotation angle of the rotary motor 2152, for example, by increasing the torsion amplitude ⁇ mod, 0 .
- FIG. 6C schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 220A that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the refractive index of the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128. .
- the light guide characteristic modulator 220A includes a refractive index modulator 2210 disposed on the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128, and a driver 2220 for driving the refractive index modulator 2210.
- the refractive index modulator 2210 is an optical element that temporally changes the refractive index of the optical path of the laser light passing therethrough.
- the refractive index modulator 2210 may be composed of, for example, an electro-optic element. Alternatively, the refractive index modulator 2210 may be composed of an acousto-optic element, for example.
- the refractive index modulator 2210 includes an optical medium 2212 that transmits laser light, and a drive electrode 2214 provided on the optical medium 2212.
- the refractive index modulator 2210 when an AC voltage is applied from the driver 2220 to the drive electrode 2214 via the electrical wiring 2230, the refractive index of the optical medium 2212 periodically changes over time. As a result, the phase of the laser light passing through the optical medium 2212 changes with time.
- the length of the refractive index modulator 2210 in the light guide direction is Lm
- the change in refractive index is ⁇ n / n
- the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is ⁇ c
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is ⁇ n / n ⁇ ⁇ c / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator 2210.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 220A can be controlled by the magnitude of the voltage applied to the refractive index modulator 2210.
- FIG. 6D schematically shows a configuration of the light guide characteristic modulator 220B that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the optical path length of the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128. .
- the light guide characteristic modulator 220B includes a refractive index modulator 2240 disposed on the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128, and a driver 2260 for driving the refractive index modulator 2240.
- Refractive index modulator 2240 has a phase difference disk 2250 disposed on the optical path.
- the phase difference disk 2250 has a concavo-convex pattern 2252 having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the laser beam.
- the phase difference disk 2250 is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis out of the optical path.
- a gear 2254 is formed on the outer periphery of the phase difference disk 2250.
- the refractive index modulator 2240 also has a rotation motor 2242 that rotates the phase difference disk 2250.
- the rotary motor 2242 is installed on a fixing member (not shown).
- a gear 2246 is attached to the rotation shaft 2244 of the rotation motor 2242.
- the gear 2246 meshes with the gear 2254 of the phase difference disk 2250.
- the rotation motor 2242 When the rotation motor 2242 receives supply of current from the driver 2260 via the electric wiring 2270, the rotation shaft 2244 rotates. This rotational motion is transmitted to the gear 2254 formed on the phase difference disk 2250 via the gear 2246. As a result, the phase difference disk 2250 is rotated, and the concave / convex pattern 2252 moves across the optical path. As a result, the optical path length of the laser light passing through the phase difference disk 2250 periodically changes, so that the phase of the laser light changes with time.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 220B can be increased by increasing the rotation speed by increasing the voltage applied to the rotary motor 2242.
- FIGS. As described with reference to FIGS. 2A to 2C and FIGS. 3A1 to 3C2, operations and effects of the speckle modulator 200 are as follows.
- speckle modulator 200 is increased the variation range [Delta] I mod drive strength of, [Delta] it mod is [Delta] I mod, Until th continue growing speckle reduction effect, the vicinity of [Delta] I mod is [Delta] I mod, the th Saturates at.
- th is defined as an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff (the drive intensity change width ⁇ I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is increased. If it by) increasing the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff, speckle reduction effect increases with M eff, speckle reduction effect in M eff> 1 is considered substantially saturated.
- ⁇ M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of the speckle modulator 200 so as to increase the M eff increases the speckle reduction effect.
- the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 are synchronized so that the change width ⁇ I mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator 200 is increased, the speckle reduction effect is maximized.
- M eff ⁇ 1 the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation.
- the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
- the speckle reduction effect is as follows with respect to the driving period t mod , the pulse emission period t pw, ill , and the modulation amplitude factor M 0 of the speckle modulator. .
- t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill
- M eff it cannot be reduced as the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
- the imaging system 100 performs the light amount adjustment by the PWM based on the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110, or the PWM based on the tpw, exp of the imager 150. It is also possible to adjust the amount of light.
- the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment When performing light quantity adjustment by PWM based on the pulse light emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110, the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment operates as follows.
- the synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least in the pulse emission period tpw, ill per illumination pulse.
- the speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th .
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th of the drive intensity change width ⁇ I mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the pulse emission period tpw, ill . Is set to be
- the synchronous controller 240 controls at least the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the driving timing of the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
- the synchronous controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110 to generate illumination pulses during the exposure period tpw, exp of the imager 150.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse light emission period t pw, ill is equal to the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include a time when the rate of change is substantially maximum.
- the synchronous controller 240 is connected to the illumination light generator 110 and the spec so that the center of the pulse emission period t pw, ill is the time when the change rate of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is substantially maximized.
- the modulator 200 is controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse emission period is t pw, ill and the driving intensity I of the speckle modulator 200
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of mod is included.
- the synchronous controller 240 includes the illumination light generator so that the pulse emission period t pw, ill includes a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. 110 and speckle modulator 200 are controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 performs illumination so that the center of the pulse emission period t pw, ill is a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value.
- the light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse emission period t pw, ill is the driving intensity I of the speckle modulator 200.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time when mod takes the maximum value and the time when mod takes the minimum value.
- the pulse emission period is less than 1 ⁇ 2 of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition A) or (Condition B).
- the second illumination pulse comes exactly half a cycle after the first illumination pulse, if the first illumination pulse includes the time at which the slope (absolute value) of the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is maximum, The second illumination pulse also includes a time at which the slope (absolute value) of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 becomes maximum (see FIG. 3B1).
- the pulse emission period is 1 ⁇ 2 or more of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition C).
- the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization.
- the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with M 0 ⁇ 1. Furthermore, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t mod ⁇ 2M 0 t pw, ill . Alternatively, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t pw, ill ⁇ t mod ⁇ M 0 t pw, ill .
- the imaging system 100 of this embodiment operates as follows.
- the illumination light generator 110 does not necessarily need to be composed of an illumination pulse generator that generates illumination pulses having a predetermined pulse emission period tpw, ill of coherent light.
- the synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least in the exposure period tpw, exp .
- the speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th .
- the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 has a value that is greater than or equal to the driving intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th of the driving intensity change width ⁇ I mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the exposure period tpw, exp . Is set as follows.
- the synchronization controller 240 controls at least the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period t pw, exp is the rate of change of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which becomes substantially maximum.
- the synchronous controller 240 sets the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 so that the center of the exposure period t pw, exp is the time when the change rate of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is substantially maximized. Control.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period t pw, exp is equal to the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value is included.
- the synchronous controller 240 may use the imager 150 and the speckle so that the exposure period t pw, exp includes a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value.
- the modulator 200 is controlled.
- the synchronization controller 240 sets the imager 150 so that the center of the exposure period t pw, exp is the time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. And the speckle modulator 200 is controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period tpw, exp is a drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time for taking the maximum value and the time for taking the minimum value.
- speckle noise can be stably and effectively reduced by the operation of the above-described configuration.
- a configuration for reducing speckle noise stably and effectively can be added to an existing lighting device or imaging system without incurring a large cost. Even if the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 and the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110 are limited, the drive timing, illumination timing, and imaging timing of the speckle modulator 200 are limited. By optimizing and increasing M eff , it is possible to sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect.
- the speckle reduction method by mechanically changing the optical fiber cannot fully exhibit the speckle pattern overlapping effect when the imaging frame rate is fast or when the imaging time is short. It is predicted.
- 60 fps imaging frame rate f r of the imaging system the about half of the time corresponding to the inverse of the imaging frame rate and exposure period t on per imaging frame of the imager, the imager per imaging frame
- PWM pulse width modulation
- the temporal response time of the eyes can be regarded as the exposure period tpw, exp per imaging frame of the imager , and for a time shorter than approximately 1/30 second (30 fps (frame / second). )) Needs to finish the speckle overlay. Further, considering the dimming by PWM as the dimming method of illumination, for the same reason as described above, a more severe requirement for the driving cycle of the mechanical vibration cycle occurs.
- the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment can sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect by optimizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator 200, the timing of illumination, and the timing of imaging to increase M eff. Therefore, it is possible to respond to such a request.
- the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment can sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect by optimizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator 200, the timing of illumination, and the timing of imaging to increase M eff. Therefore, it is possible to respond to such a request.
- PWM pulse width modulation
- FIG. 7 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including an imaging system according to the second embodiment.
- members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- explanation will be given with emphasis on the different parts. That is, the part which is not touched by the following description is the same as that of 1st Embodiment.
- the imaging system 100A according to the present embodiment is different from the imaging system 100 according to the first embodiment in the illumination device 102A.
- the illumination light generator 110 repeatedly generates one illumination pulse group including a plurality of illumination pulses as an illumination pulse group sequence.
- the number of the plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group is 3 or more.
- the period from the lighting time of the first lighting pulse to the lighting time of the last lighting pulse in one lighting pulse group is defined as an effective pulse emission period.
- the effective pulse emission period is, for example, a period twice or more as long as the net pulse emission period of a plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group.
- the illumination device 102 ⁇ / b> A includes a pulse width modulation (PWM) light controller 250.
- the pulse width modulation type light controller 250 adjusts the effective amount of illumination light by controlling the pulse width of a plurality of illumination pulses in the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff .
- the pulse width modulation type light controller 250 divides the pulse emission period tpw corresponding to the desired light control amount into a plurality of pulse emission periods tpw, ill, 1 , ... , tpw, ill, n (n is 2 or more).
- n represents the number of a plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group.
- the illuminating device 102A has a configuration in which a multi-pulse division type pulse width modulation light controller 250 is added to the illuminating device 102 according to the first embodiment.
- the pulse width modulation type light controller 250 controls the driver 114 of the illumination light generator 110 based on a signal input from the synchronization controller 240.
- FIGS. 8A and 8B show the irradiation waveform of the illumination pulse generator, the driving waveform of the speckle modulator, and the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff that serves as an indicator of the speckle reduction effect in each pulse width modulation method.
- Single Pulse pulse-width modulation method as shown in the upper part of FIG. 8A, the time of the exposure period t on, corresponding duration of the illumination pulse (or referred to as period) to the desired amount
- the amount of illumination light is adjusted so that the pulse emission period tpw, ill is reached .
- ⁇ I Mod decreases in proportion to the pulse emission period t pw, ill, and thus M eff also decreases.
- “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation method” In this case, by dispersing the emission timing of the irradiation pulse, the effective pulse emission period is expanded even if the pulse emission period tpw, ill is reduced in order to reduce the irradiation light amount. , Effective ⁇ I mod (this is ⁇ I mod, eff ) can be enlarged. For this reason, it is possible to effectively increase the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff that serves as a speckle reduction index.
- the “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller” When the time width for passing a plurality of illumination pulses within the exposure possible period t on is an effective pulse emission period tpw, eff , the “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller” It functions as an “effective pulse emission period expander” that effectively expands.
- the concept of “effective pulse light emission period expander” is that the effective pulse light emission period can be expanded by dividing the illumination pulse in time, without adjusting the light amount as described above. This is a concept larger than the concept of “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller”.
- ⁇ I mod, eff and t pw, eff are increased for the synchronous controller 240.
- the synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least during an effective pulse emission period.
- the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization.
- the synchronous controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110 to generate illumination pulses during the exposure period (t pw, exp ) of the imager 150.
- the speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator.
- the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th .
- the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is equal to or larger than the driving intensity threshold width ⁇ I mod, th of the driving intensity change width ⁇ I mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff .
- the synchronous controller 240 controls at least the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle modulator drive.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which the rate of change of the intensity I mod is maximized.
- the synchronous controller 240 may connect the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle so that any one of the plurality of illumination pulses includes a time at which the change rate of the speckle modulator driving intensity I mod is maximum.
- the modulator 200 is controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 may connect the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle so that the center of the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the time at which the rate of change of the speckle modulator driving intensity I mod is maximized.
- the modulator 200 is controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of the modulator driving intensity I mod is included.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which the center value of the maximum value and the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the modulator is included.
- the synchronous controller 240 may determine that one of the plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group is the center of the substantial maximum value and minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time when the value is taken.
- the synchronization controller 240 is set so that the center of the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a time at which the center of the substantial maximum value and the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is taken.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled.
- the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a speckle.
- the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include a time for taking the maximum value and a time for taking the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the modulator.
- the effective pulse emission period is less than 1/2 of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition D), (Condition E), or (Condition F).
- the time at which the slope (absolute value) of the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is maximized is the first illumination pulse group.
- the second illumination pulse group also includes a time at which the slope (absolute value) of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 becomes maximum.
- the effective pulse emission period is 1/2 or more of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition G).
- the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization.
- the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with M 0 ⁇ 1. Furthermore, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t mod ⁇ 2M 0 t pw, eff . Alternatively, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t pw, eff ⁇ t mod ⁇ M 0 t pw, eff .
- the speckle modulator 200 is at least one of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and the wavelength modulator 230. Although it may be configured, it may be configured by combining them.
- FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9C An example of the speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators is shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9C.
- the effect of speckle reduction by these combinations is as follows.
- FIG. 9A schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining the same two speckle modulators M1 in terms of the driving mechanism and the optical principle.
- the speckle modulator M1 is configured to apply vibration to the first optical fiber 124.
- each speckle modulator M1 is typically depicted as the light guide characteristic modulator 210A shown in FIG. 6A.
- FIG. 9B schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators M1 and M2 having different driving mechanisms but the same optical principle.
- the speckle modulator M1 is as described above.
- the speckle modulator M2 is configured to rotate the first optical fiber 124.
- the speckle modulator M2 is typically depicted as the light guide characteristic modulator 210B shown in FIG. 6B.
- the temporal superposition effect of the light and dark patterns by speckles is used, it is an optically combined configuration of speckle modulators M1 and M2 of the same type.
- FIG. 9A There is an effect observed by adding an effective modulation amplitude factor.
- the light and dark pattern pattern due to speckles caused by the speckle modulators M1 and M2 may change differently.
- the speckle reduction effect is often stronger (that is, M eff, total > 1) than in the configuration example of FIG. 9A.
- FIG. 9C schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators M1 and M3 having different optical principles.
- the speckle modulator M1 is as described above.
- the speckle modulator M3 is configured to change the wavelength of the laser light with time.
- the speckle modulator M3 is depicted as the wavelength modulator 230 shown in FIG.
- FIG. 10 schematically shows the overall configuration of the illumination apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 10, members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- the illumination device 102B includes an illumination light generator 110, a light guide optical system 120B that guides laser light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a laser guided by the light guide optical system 120B.
- An irradiation optical system 140B for irradiating light is provided.
- the light guide optical system 120B includes a collimating lens 122B that collimates the light beam emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a coupling lens 124B that couples the light beam collimated by the collimating lens 122B to the irradiation optical system 140B.
- the collimating lens 122B and the coupling lens 124B are schematically illustrated as one lens in FIG. 10, but may actually be configured by one lens or may be configured by a plurality of lenses. It may be.
- the lighting device 102B also includes a speckle modulator 200, a synchronization controller 240, and a pulse width modulation type light controller 250.
- the speckle modulator 200 includes a light guide characteristic modulator 220 and a wavelength modulator 230.
- the light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam between the collimating lens 122B and the coupling lens 124B.
- speckle modulator 200 Details of the speckle modulator 200, the light guide characteristic modulator 220, the wavelength modulator 230, and the synchronization controller 240 are as described in the first embodiment, and details of the pulse width modulation type optical controller 250 are described in the second embodiment. As explained.
- the change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator 200 is speckle within a time period that is considered to be a response time with respect to a change in the image of the living body (about 33 msec when the living body is a human).
- the observer can obtain the same speckle reduction effect as that of the first to third embodiments.
- FIG. 11 schematically shows the overall configuration of a microscope system including an imaging system according to the fifth embodiment.
- members having the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
- the imaging system 100 ⁇ / b> C includes an illumination device 102 ⁇ / b> C that illuminates the observation object 190 and the imaging device 104.
- the illumination device 102C includes an illumination light generator 110, a light guide optical system 120C that guides laser light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and illumination that emits laser light guided by the light guide optical system 120C.
- An optical system 300 is provided.
- the light guide optical system 120C couples the optical fiber 126C that guides the laser light, the collimator lens 122C that collimates the light beam emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and the light beam collimated by the collimator lens 122C to the optical fiber 126C.
- a fiber coupling lens 124C is provided.
- the collimating lens 122C and the fiber coupling lens 124C are schematically illustrated as one lens in FIG. 11, but may actually be configured by one lens or may be configured by a plurality of lenses. May be.
- the illumination optical system 300 includes a collimating optical system 310 that collimates the light beam emitted from the optical fiber 126C, a beam splitter 320 that splits the light beam collimated by the collimating optical system 310 into two light beams, and a beam splitter 320.
- the first mirror 330A that reflects one of the light beams divided by the first mirror 330A and the first light beam that is reflected by the first mirror 330A toward the observation object 190 placed on the sample stage 350 from below.
- the second irradiation optical system 340B is provided.
- the illumination device 102 ⁇ / b> C also includes a speckle modulator 200, a synchronization controller 240, and a pulse width modulation type light controller 250.
- the speckle modulator 200 includes a first light guide characteristic modulator 210, a second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and a wavelength modulator 230.
- the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam between the collimating lens 122C and the fiber coupling lens 124C.
- the first light guide characteristic modulator 210 is disposed in the middle part of the optical fiber 126C.
- the details of the speckle modulator 200, the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, the wavelength modulator 230, and the synchronous controller 240 are as described in the first embodiment, and the pulse width modulation method. Details of the light controller 250 are as described in the second embodiment.
- the imaging system 100 ⁇ / b> C also includes an objective optical system 360 disposed to face the sample stage 350, a lens barrel 370 that supports the objective optical system 360, and an eyepiece and imaging optical system 380 attached to the lens barrel 370. .
- the laser light emitted from the light guiding optical system 120C is split into two light beams by the beam splitter 320 through the collimating optical system 310.
- One light beam is reflected by the first mirror 330A, and is irradiated from below onto the observation object 190 via the first irradiation optical system 340A.
- the other light beam is reflected by the second mirror 330B, and is irradiated on the observation object 190 from obliquely above via the second irradiation optical system 340B.
- the light irradiated on the observation object 190 is reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190.
- a part of the light reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190 enters the objective optical system 360.
- the light incident on the objective optical system 360 is imaged on the light receiving surface of the imager 150 via the eyepiece and the imaging optical system 380, for example, and image information of the observation object 190 is acquired by the imager 150.
- the image information acquired by the imager 150 is displayed on the display 170 after image processing is performed by the image processing circuit 160.
- the light incident on the objective optical system 360 is imaged on the retina of the observer via the eyepiece and the imaging optical system 380, and the image of the observation object 190 is observed by the observer.
- the operations and effects related to speckle reduction are the same as the operations and effects obtained in the first to fourth embodiments.
- An illumination pulse generator that generates an illumination pulse of coherent light
- a speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light
- An illumination apparatus comprising: a synchronous controller that controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator and the drive timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
- the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill )
- the illumination device according to [3], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled so as to include a time at which a change rate of the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized.
- the synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a time at which a change rate of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized.
- the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ).
- the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) includes a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value.
- the synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between a maximum value and a minimum value.
- the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill )
- the illumination device according to [3], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled such that the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator includes a time at which a maximum value and a time at which a minimum value is taken. .
- the speckle modulator includes a first speckle modulator and a second speckle modulator
- the synchronous controller includes a pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the first speckle modulator, and / or Or the illuminating device as described in [1] controlled in synchronization with the drive timing of the second speckle modulator.
- the drive intensity threshold width ( ⁇ I mod, th ) When the change range of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator, in which the reduction of the speckle is saturated with respect to the change of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator, is the drive intensity threshold width ( ⁇ I mod, th ), The driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the modulator is set to a driving intensity threshold ( ⁇ I mod, th ) or more, [2].
- the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is such that the change width ( ⁇ I mod ) of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator in the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is the drive intensity threshold.
- phase modulator includes a light guide member changing device that mechanically changes a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
- phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device.
- the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the illumination device according to [16], wherein ⁇ n / n ⁇ ⁇ c / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
- An imaging system including the illumination device according to any one of [2] to [12] and an imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period (t pw, exp ).
- the synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization, and in the exposure period (t pw, exp ) of the imager
- the synchronous controller synchronizes and controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager, Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
- the change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width ( ⁇ I mod, th ),
- the pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator; For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically, When M 0 I mod, 0 / ⁇ I mod, th ,
- the imaging system according to [21], wherein the synchronous controller drives the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator with M 0 ⁇ 1 and further drives with t mod ⁇ 2M 0 t pw, ill .
- the synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization with each other, Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
- the change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width ( ⁇ I mod, th ),
- the pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator; For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically, When M 0 I mod, 0 / ⁇ I mod, th ,
- phase modulator includes a light guide member variation device that mechanically varies a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
- phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device.
- the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the imaging system according to [29], wherein ⁇ n / n ⁇ ⁇ c / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
- An endoscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [21] to [33], wherein the imaging system further performs image processing on an image captured by the imager.
- An endoscope system including a circuit and an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
- a microscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [21] to [33], wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager.
- a microscope system having an image display unit for displaying an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
- An illumination light generator for generating coherent light
- a speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light
- An imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period (t pw, exp );
- An imaging system having a synchronization controller that controls the imaging timing of the imager and the driving timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
- the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp ) [38]
- the synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a time at which the rate of change of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized. And [39] for controlling the speckle modulator.
- the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp )
- the exposure period (t pw, exp ) includes a time at which the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between a maximum value and a minimum value.
- the center of the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between the maximum value and the minimum value.
- the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp ) [38]
- the speckle modulator includes a first speckle modulator and a second speckle modulator, and the synchronous controller includes an exposure timing of the imager, the first speckle modulator, and / or the second speckle modulator.
- the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is equal to the drive intensity threshold width ( ⁇ I mod ) of the drive intensity change width ( ⁇ I mod ) of the speckle modulator in the exposure period (t pw, exp ).
- phase modulator includes a light guide member variation device that mechanically varies a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
- phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- the refractive index modulator includes at least one of an electro-optic element and an acousto-optic element.
- the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device.
- the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the imaging system according to [51], wherein ⁇ n / n ⁇ ⁇ c / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
- An endoscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [36] to [55], wherein the imaging system further performs image processing on an image captured by the imager.
- An endoscope system including a circuit and an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
- a microscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [36] to [55], wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager;
- a microscope system having an image display unit for displaying an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Surgery (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
- Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Instruments For Viewing The Inside Of Hollow Bodies (AREA)
- Endoscopes (AREA)
- Microscoopes, Condenser (AREA)
Abstract
This lighting apparatus (102) comprises a lighting pulse generator (110) which generates a lighting pulse of coherent light, a speckle modulator (200) which modulates speckle generated by the coherent light, and a synchronization controller (240) which performs control by synchronizing the pulse generation timing of the lighting pulse generator and the driving timing of the speckle modulator.
Description
本発明は、コヒーレント光を使った照明装置に関する。
The present invention relates to a lighting device using coherent light.
レーザ光源に代表されるコヒーレント光を照明に使った撮像システムでは、観察対象に僅かな凹凸等の散乱構造があるとイメージャの撮像面において細かな斑点模様(スペックル)が発生し、取得した画像にノイズ(これをスペックルノイズという)として現れ、視認性に障害となることが知られている。この現象は電子的な撮像システムに限ったものではなく、撮像面に相当する生体の網膜上でも発生するため、コヒーレント光を照明に使った照明装置、例えばレーザプロジェクタ等についても同様の問題が発生する。このスペックルの発生原因は、観察対象の凹凸等から散乱した光が干渉し、撮像面や網膜上に細かな明暗のパターンが形成されるためであることが知られている。
In an imaging system that uses coherent light, such as a laser light source, for illumination, if the observation target has a scattering structure such as slight irregularities, a fine speckle pattern occurs on the imaging surface of the imager, and the acquired image It is known that it appears as noise (this is called speckle noise) and hinders visibility. This phenomenon is not limited to electronic imaging systems, but also occurs on the retina of the living body corresponding to the imaging surface, so the same problem occurs with illumination devices that use coherent light for illumination, such as laser projectors. To do. The cause of this speckle is known to be that light scattered from the unevenness of the observation object interferes and a fine light-dark pattern is formed on the imaging surface or the retina.
これを低減するための多様なスペックル低減方法が知られており、代表的なものを以下に列記する。尚、以下の説明では、「コヒーレント光」のことをその代表である「レーザ光」として記載することが多いが、本明細書では、一般的な「コヒーレント光」にも読み替え可能とする。また、その一般的な「コヒーレント光」は「部分コヒーレント光」も含むものとする。
A variety of speckle reduction methods are known to reduce this, and typical ones are listed below. In the following description, “coherent light” is often described as “laser light” as a representative example, but in this specification, it can be read as general “coherent light”. The general “coherent light” also includes “partial coherent light”.
(1)[光源自体の実効的なコヒーレンス性を下げることでスペックルノイズを低減する方法]
(1-a)LD(レーザダイオード)を電流駆動する際に、駆動波形として高周波重畳等を行うことでスペクトルの多モード化を促進して実効的なスペクトル幅を広げる。
(1-b)LDにセルフパルセーション機能を搭載し、光の位相や波長を乱す。
(1-c)波長可変レーザのスペクトルを高速で変化させて実効的なスペクトル幅を広げる。
(1-d)相互に独立な多数のレーザを組み合わせて実効的なコヒーレンス性を低下させる。 (1) [Method of reducing speckle noise by reducing the effective coherence of the light source itself]
(1-a) When an LD (laser diode) is driven by current, high frequency superposition or the like is performed as a drive waveform to promote multimode spectrum and widen the effective spectrum width.
(1-b) The LD is equipped with a self-pulsation function to disturb the phase and wavelength of light.
(1-c) The spectrum of the tunable laser is changed at high speed to widen the effective spectrum width.
(1-d) A combination of a plurality of mutually independent lasers reduces the effective coherence.
(1-a)LD(レーザダイオード)を電流駆動する際に、駆動波形として高周波重畳等を行うことでスペクトルの多モード化を促進して実効的なスペクトル幅を広げる。
(1-b)LDにセルフパルセーション機能を搭載し、光の位相や波長を乱す。
(1-c)波長可変レーザのスペクトルを高速で変化させて実効的なスペクトル幅を広げる。
(1-d)相互に独立な多数のレーザを組み合わせて実効的なコヒーレンス性を低下させる。 (1) [Method of reducing speckle noise by reducing the effective coherence of the light source itself]
(1-a) When an LD (laser diode) is driven by current, high frequency superposition or the like is performed as a drive waveform to promote multimode spectrum and widen the effective spectrum width.
(1-b) The LD is equipped with a self-pulsation function to disturb the phase and wavelength of light.
(1-c) The spectrum of the tunable laser is changed at high speed to widen the effective spectrum width.
(1-d) A combination of a plurality of mutually independent lasers reduces the effective coherence.
(2)[スペックルによる明暗パターンを時間的に変化させ、この明暗パターンの時間的な重ねあわせ効果を利用して、実効的なスペックルノイズを低減する方法]
(2-a)観察対象を振動させ、スペックルパターンを変化させる。
(2-b)光源から観察対象に至る光路中の光位相の変化を引き起し、スペックルパターンを変化させる。 (2) [Method for reducing effective speckle noise by temporally changing the light / dark pattern due to speckle and utilizing the temporal superposition effect of the light / dark pattern]
(2-a) The observation target is vibrated to change the speckle pattern.
(2-b) The speckle pattern is changed by causing a change in the optical phase in the optical path from the light source to the observation target.
(2-a)観察対象を振動させ、スペックルパターンを変化させる。
(2-b)光源から観察対象に至る光路中の光位相の変化を引き起し、スペックルパターンを変化させる。 (2) [Method for reducing effective speckle noise by temporally changing the light / dark pattern due to speckle and utilizing the temporal superposition effect of the light / dark pattern]
(2-a) The observation target is vibrated to change the speckle pattern.
(2-b) The speckle pattern is changed by causing a change in the optical phase in the optical path from the light source to the observation target.
(2-b)の例として、レーザ光を光ファイバーで導光して照射する構成において、光ファイバーの形状や応力を変化させ、時間的な導光モードを変化させることで、照射されるレーザ光の位相変化を引き起こし、スペックルパターンを変化させる方法が提案されている。
As an example of (2-b), in a configuration in which laser light is guided by an optical fiber and irradiated, the shape and stress of the optical fiber are changed, and the temporal light guide mode is changed to change the laser light to be irradiated. A method for causing a phase change and changing a speckle pattern has been proposed.
例えば、特開2003-156698号公報は、そのような構成のレーザ光源装置を開示している。このレーザ光源装置では、レーザ光源から出射したレーザ光が光ファイバーの入射端に入り、出射端からレーザ照明光として出射される。光ファイバーの中間部には、光ファイバーに振動を与える加振装置が設けられている。この加振装置によって光ファイバーを振動させると、光ファイバーの内部でレーザ光のモード変換などによる光の位相変化が発生する。このレーザ光の特性変化(ここでは光位相変化)により、光ファイバーから観察対象に照射されたときに発生するスペックルによる縞模様が移動または変化する。このスペックルによる縞模様は、人間の目では感知できないような速さで移動または変化するため、人間には、スペックルによる縞模様が重ね合わせられて、平均化された模様として感じられるため、スペックルノイズが低減されることになる。
For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-156698 discloses a laser light source device having such a configuration. In this laser light source device, laser light emitted from the laser light source enters the incident end of the optical fiber, and is emitted from the emission end as laser illumination light. An excitation device that applies vibration to the optical fiber is provided at an intermediate portion of the optical fiber. When the optical fiber is vibrated by this vibration device, a light phase change occurs due to laser beam mode conversion or the like inside the optical fiber. Due to the characteristic change of the laser beam (here, the optical phase change), the stripe pattern due to speckles generated when the observation target is irradiated from the optical fiber moves or changes. Because this speckle stripe pattern moves or changes at a speed that human eyes cannot perceive, humans feel that the speckle stripe pattern is superimposed and averaged, Speckle noise will be reduced.
前述の(1-a)の手法は、使用できるレーザとしてはLDに限定され、LDの個体差毎にスペクトルの広がり方が異なり、必ずしもスペックル低減に安定かつ十分な効果を得られないことが多い。(1-b)と(1-c)の手法は、特殊な機能を集積したレーザが必要であり、また(1-d)の手法は、多数のレーザが必要であり、十分な低減効果を発揮する撮像システムを実現するためには、高価なものにならざるを得ない。
The above-mentioned method (1-a) is limited to the LD as a laser that can be used. The spread of the spectrum differs depending on the individual difference of the LD, and a stable and sufficient effect for reducing speckles cannot always be obtained. Many. The methods (1-b) and (1-c) require a laser integrated with a special function, and the method (1-d) requires a large number of lasers and has a sufficient reduction effect. In order to realize an imaging system that exhibits it, it must be expensive.
一方、(2-a)の手法は、観察対象がプロジェクタのスクリーンなどのように微小振動してもよい場合に限定されるため、例えば顕微鏡や内視鏡などの観察対象には適用が難しい。(2-b)の手法は、観察対象を振動させる必要がないため、観察対象に対して制約のない手法であるが、光ファイバーの形状や応力を機械的に変化させる必要があるため、光学的な変調速度の制約が大きい。従って、この手法では、例えば電子的な撮像システムにおいて、撮像のフレームレートが速い場合や撮像時間が短い場合等では、スペックル模様の重なり効果が十分に発揮できないことが予測される。
On the other hand, since the method (2-a) is limited to a case where the observation target may be finely oscillated like a projector screen, it is difficult to apply to the observation target such as a microscope or an endoscope. The method (2-b) is a method that does not limit the observation target because it is not necessary to vibrate the observation target. However, since it is necessary to mechanically change the shape and stress of the optical fiber, There are significant restrictions on the modulation speed. Therefore, with this technique, for example, in an electronic imaging system, it is predicted that the speckle pattern overlapping effect cannot be sufficiently exhibited when the imaging frame rate is fast or when the imaging time is short.
本発明の目的は、安定的かつ効果的にスペックルノイズを低減することが可能な照明装置を提供することである。
An object of the present invention is to provide an illumination device that can stably and effectively reduce speckle noise.
本発明に係る照明装置は、コヒーレント光の照明パルスを生成する照明パルス生成器と、前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する。
An illumination device according to the present invention includes an illumination pulse generator that generates an illumination pulse of coherent light, a speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light, a pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, and the speckle. It has a synchronous controller that controls the drive timing of the modulator in synchronization.
[主要な形態の効果を議論するための準備]
まず、スペックルノイズを低減する構成や要件を詳細に議論する前に、種々のレーザ光の光学特性のモジュレータを使って照明装置または撮像システムで得られるスペックル低減効果の一般的な低減メカニズムについて、図1Aと図1Bと図1Cと図2Aと図2Bと図2Cを用いて説明する。尚、本明細書では、スペックル低減の為に、光源そのものの出射光の光学特性を含み、光源から観察対象までの光路における光学特性を変化させて、観測されるスペックル模様の強弱や強度分布を変化させたり、スペックル模様の位置的な変化等を引き起こしたりする様々な光学特性のモジュレータを「スペックルモジュレータ」と呼ぶこととする。 [Preparations for discussing the effects of the main forms]
First, before discussing in detail the configuration and requirements for reducing speckle noise, we will discuss a general mechanism for reducing the speckle reduction effect obtained by a lighting device or an imaging system using a modulator of optical characteristics of various laser beams. 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, and 2C. In this specification, in order to reduce speckles, the optical characteristics of the emitted light of the light source itself are included, and the optical characteristics in the optical path from the light source to the observation target are changed to change the strength and intensity of the observed speckle pattern. Modulators having various optical characteristics that change the distribution or cause positional changes of the speckle pattern are called “speckle modulators”.
まず、スペックルノイズを低減する構成や要件を詳細に議論する前に、種々のレーザ光の光学特性のモジュレータを使って照明装置または撮像システムで得られるスペックル低減効果の一般的な低減メカニズムについて、図1Aと図1Bと図1Cと図2Aと図2Bと図2Cを用いて説明する。尚、本明細書では、スペックル低減の為に、光源そのものの出射光の光学特性を含み、光源から観察対象までの光路における光学特性を変化させて、観測されるスペックル模様の強弱や強度分布を変化させたり、スペックル模様の位置的な変化等を引き起こしたりする様々な光学特性のモジュレータを「スペックルモジュレータ」と呼ぶこととする。 [Preparations for discussing the effects of the main forms]
First, before discussing in detail the configuration and requirements for reducing speckle noise, we will discuss a general mechanism for reducing the speckle reduction effect obtained by a lighting device or an imaging system using a modulator of optical characteristics of various laser beams. 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B, and 2C. In this specification, in order to reduce speckles, the optical characteristics of the emitted light of the light source itself are included, and the optical characteristics in the optical path from the light source to the observation target are changed to change the strength and intensity of the observed speckle pattern. Modulators having various optical characteristics that change the distribution or cause positional changes of the speckle pattern are called “speckle modulators”.
また、前述のスペックル低減を得るために様々な光学特性の変調を引起すためのスペックルモジュレータの駆動の大きさを「スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度」と定義し、Imodと記載する。ここで、「スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度」の具体的な例としては、レーザの実効的な光スペクトル幅の拡大縮小または光波長シフトを引き起こすためのレーザの波長変調回路の駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路の途中に配置される光の位相の変化を引き起すための位相モジュレータの駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路として光ファイバーを使う場合において光の位相を変化させるために、光ファイバーの機械的な曲げ変化を発生させる振動装置の駆動強度、光ファイバーへの印加応力を変化させる応力印加装置の駆動強度、光ファイバーの捻りなどを発生させる回転装置の駆動強度などを意味する。
In addition, the magnitude of the speckle modulator driving for causing the modulation of various optical characteristics to obtain the above speckle reduction is defined as “the driving strength of the speckle modulator” and is described as I mod . Here, as a specific example of “drive intensity of speckle modulator”, the drive intensity of the laser wavelength modulation circuit for causing the effective optical spectrum width expansion or reduction or optical wavelength shift of the laser, observation from the light source In order to change the phase of light when an optical fiber is used as the optical path to guide the observation target from the light source to the observation target, the driving intensity of the phase modulator to cause the change of the phase of the light arranged in the middle of the optical path guided to the target Furthermore, it means the driving strength of a vibration device that generates a mechanical bending change of the optical fiber, the driving strength of a stress application device that changes the stress applied to the optical fiber, the driving strength of a rotating device that generates twisting of the optical fiber, and the like.
図1Aないし図1Cは、レーザ光源から観察対象に至るレーザ光の光路中に光ファイバーがあり、これを機械的に振動させることによるスペックル低減メカニズムを説明したものである。
1A to 1C illustrate a speckle reduction mechanism by mechanically vibrating an optical fiber in the optical path of laser light from a laser light source to an observation target.
図1Aは、光ファイバーを振動させる振動装置で構成されたスペックルモジュレータを示している。図示しない固定部材の上に、振動を吸収するダンパーDPを介して、振動モーターMTが設置されている。振動モーターMTの回転軸には、回転軸に対して非対称な重心を有する重りが取り付けられている。振動モーターMTには突き当て部材TPが固定されている。突き当て部材TPは光ファイバーFBに接している。振動モーターMTの回転軸が回転すると、振動モーターMTが振動する。この振動は突き当て部材TPを介して光ファイバーFBに伝達される。その結果、光ファイバーFBが振動される。
FIG. 1A shows a speckle modulator composed of a vibration device that vibrates an optical fiber. A vibration motor MT is installed on a fixing member (not shown) via a damper DP that absorbs vibration. A weight having a center of gravity which is asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis is attached to the rotation axis of the vibration motor MT. An abutting member TP is fixed to the vibration motor MT. The abutting member TP is in contact with the optical fiber FB. When the rotation shaft of the vibration motor MT rotates, the vibration motor MT vibrates. This vibration is transmitted to the optical fiber FB via the abutting member TP. As a result, the optical fiber FB is vibrated.
このように、光ファイバーFBを振動させることにより、光ファイバーFB内でのレーザ光の位相やモードを時間的に変化させ、スペックル模様を時間的に変化させることができる(図1B)。ひとつの撮像フレームの時間内では、撮像面上に形成される画像は、時間的に変化するスペックル模様が重なって観測されるため、スペックル模様が平均化されて、撮像面上での実効的なスペックルノイズを低減することができる。図1Bに示すように、撮像時間内のスペックル模様の変化(または移動量)が十分大きく、撮像時間内のスペックル模様の重ね合わせが十分に平均化されたとみなせる状態になると、これ以上振動振幅を大きくしてもスペックル模様の時間平均での重なりによるスペックル低減効果は飽和すると考えられる。
Thus, by vibrating the optical fiber FB, the phase and mode of the laser light in the optical fiber FB can be changed with time, and the speckle pattern can be changed with time (FIG. 1B). Within one imaging frame time, the image formed on the imaging surface is observed by overlapping speckle patterns that change over time, so the speckle patterns are averaged and effective on the imaging surface. Speckle noise can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 1B, when the change (or movement amount) of the speckle pattern within the imaging time is sufficiently large and the superposition of the speckle pattern within the imaging time can be regarded as being sufficiently averaged, the vibration is further increased. Even if the amplitude is increased, the speckle reduction effect due to the time average overlap of speckle patterns is considered to be saturated.
図1Cは、本発明者らが実際に行った実験の結果を示しており、具体的には、光ファイバーの振動振幅Xmod,0に対する実効的なスペックルコントラストの変化を測定した結果を示している。図1Bに関連して予測した内容と合致して、振動振幅があるしきい値付近ΔXmod,thで最大となり、これ以上、振幅を増やしてもスペックル低減効果は殆ど変わらず、飽和する結果が得られている。尚、この実験では、スペックル模様が撮像時間内で十分に重なるように長い撮像時間で撮像した時のスペックルコントラストを評価している。
FIG. 1C shows a result of an experiment actually conducted by the present inventors. Specifically, FIG. 1C shows a result of measuring an effective speckle contrast change with respect to the vibration amplitude X mod, 0 of the optical fiber. Yes. Consistent with what was predicted in connection with FIG. 1B, the vibration amplitude becomes maximum at a certain threshold value ΔX mod, th , and the speckle reduction effect is hardly changed even when the amplitude is increased. Is obtained. In this experiment, speckle contrast is evaluated when imaging is performed with a long imaging time so that the speckle pattern is sufficiently overlapped within the imaging time.
図2Aは、波長が振れ幅λmodで時間的に変化されたレーザ光のスペクトルを示している。図2Bは、図2Aに示されたレーザ光の波長の振れ幅λmodに対応したスペックル模様の1次元での光強度分布を示している。図2Cは、レーザ光の波長の振れ幅の変化幅Δλmod,0に対する実効的なスペックルコントラストの変化を示している。図2Bと図2Cに示されるように、レーザ光の波長の振れ幅λmodを大きくすると、スペックル現象に起因する光強度分布が小さくなる(すなわちスペックルコントラストが小さくなる)。これは、スペックルモジュレータとして、レーザ光の波長を変調して、撮像時間的で積算した光の波長の幅が広がって見えることによるものであり、実効的にレーザ光のコヒーレンス性を低下させたことに相当する。撮像光学系やイメージャの分解能によって、スペックル低減効果を飽和させるための波長変化幅に相当するしきい値Δλmod,thが決まるが、撮像時間内でこれ以上の波長変化を行ってもスペックル低減効果が殆ど変化しないのは、図1Aないし図1Cの場合と同様である。
FIG. 2A shows a spectrum of laser light whose wavelength is temporally changed with a fluctuation width λ mod . FIG. 2B shows a one-dimensional light intensity distribution of a speckle pattern corresponding to the wavelength fluctuation width λ mod of the laser light shown in FIG. 2A. FIG. 2C shows the change in effective speckle contrast with respect to the change width Δλ mod, 0 of the fluctuation width of the wavelength of the laser beam. As shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C, when the fluctuation width λ mod of the wavelength of the laser light is increased, the light intensity distribution resulting from the speckle phenomenon is reduced (that is, the speckle contrast is reduced). This is because, as a speckle modulator, the wavelength of the laser light is modulated and the wavelength range of the integrated light appears to expand, effectively reducing the coherence of the laser light. It corresponds to that. The threshold Δλ mod, th corresponding to the wavelength change width for saturating the speckle reduction effect is determined by the resolution of the imaging optical system and imager. The reduction effect hardly changes, as in the case of FIGS. 1A to 1C.
本明細書では、スペックル低減の為の様々なスペックルモジュレータの効果をまとめてより一般化して議論するために、スペックルノイズを低減するためのスペックルモジュレータによらず、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度をImod、この駆動強度振幅をImod,0とし、また、このスペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動するときの時間周期をスペックル変調周期tmodとする。また、スペックルコントラストの低下がほぼ最大となり、それ以上の駆動強度ではスペックル低減効果が飽和する条件に対応する駆動強度の幅をスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,thとし、ひとつの撮像フレーム時間内でのイメージャの露光期間に対応するスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅をΔImodとする。(撮像フレーム時間内で光源のパルス発光期間tpw,illを制限するのではなく、イメージャの露光期間(または光蓄積期間)tpw,expを制限することにより、PWMによる光量調整を行うことも可能であり、この場合、露光期間tpw,expでの駆動強度の変化幅がΔImodになる)更に、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅Imod,0をスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,thで規格化したものを変調振幅因子M0、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodをΔImod,thで規格化したものを実効的変調振幅因子Meffと定義する。
In this specification, in order to summarize and discuss the effects of various speckle modulators for speckle reduction in a generalized manner, the speckle modulator drive is used regardless of the speckle modulator for reducing speckle noise. The intensity is I mod , the drive intensity amplitude is I mod, 0, and the time period when the speckle modulator is periodically driven is the speckle modulation period t mod . In addition, the speckle modulator drive strength threshold width ΔI mod, th is defined as the width of the drive strength corresponding to the condition that the speckle reduction effect is saturated at a drive strength higher than that. Let ΔI mod be the change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator corresponding to the exposure period of the imager within the imaging frame time. (Instead of limiting the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the light source within the imaging frame time, the light amount adjustment by PWM may be performed by limiting the exposure period (or light accumulation period) tpw, exp of the imager. In this case, the change width of the drive intensity during the exposure period tpw, exp becomes ΔI mod ) Further, the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator is set to the drive intensity threshold width ΔI of the speckle modulator. A value normalized by mod, th is defined as a modulation amplitude factor M 0 , and a change width ΔI mod of the speckle modulator drive intensity is defined as ΔI mod, th as an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff .
上述の議論によると、一般的に、ひとつの撮像フレーム内でのイメージャの露光可能期間tON、または、光源のパルス発光期間tpw,illに対して十分速い周期でスペックルモジュレータの駆動を行うか、イメージャの撮像タイミングとスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングとレーザ光の照射タイミングが最適に同期されていれば、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくしていくと、ΔImodがΔImod,thになるまではスペックル低減効果が単調に高まっていき、ΔImodがΔImod,thとなる近傍で飽和する。また、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくすることなどにより、実効的変調振幅因子Meffを大きくすると、スペックル低減効果もMeffとともに単調に高まり、単一のスペックル低減メカニズムを動作させる場合においては、Meff≧1ではスペックル低減効果はほぼ飽和すると考えられる。
According to the above discussion, in general, the speckle modulator is driven at a sufficiently fast cycle with respect to the exposure period t ON of the imager within one imaging frame or the pulse emission period t pw, ill of the light source. Alternatively, if the imaging timing of the imager, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the irradiation timing of the laser beam are optimally synchronized, when the change width ΔI mod of the driving strength of the speckle modulator is increased, ΔI mod becomes ΔI Until it becomes mod, th , the speckle reduction effect increases monotonously and saturates in the vicinity where ΔI mod becomes ΔI mod, th . In addition, if the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff is increased by increasing the change width ΔI mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator, the speckle reduction effect increases monotonously with M eff , and a single speckle reduction mechanism Is operated, it is considered that the speckle reduction effect is almost saturated when M eff ≧ 1.
なお、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,thは、導光部材である光ファイバーに機械的な変動を加える後述する導光部材変動装置の振動における変位にして0.1mmであるため、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、導光部材変動装置による光ファイバーの振動の変位にして0.1mm以上であることが望ましい。これは、実験時の光ファイバーのコア径Φc=0.02mmの5倍程度であるため、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、導光部材変動装置の振動による光ファイバーの変位にして5Φc以上であることが望ましいと考えられる。
The driving strength threshold width ΔI mod, th is 0.1 mm as a displacement in vibration of a light guide member changing device (described later) that mechanically changes the optical fiber as the light guide member. The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is preferably 0.1 mm or more in terms of the displacement of the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member varying device. Since this is about five times the core diameter Φc = 0.02 mm of the optical fiber at the time of the experiment, the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator is 5Φc as the displacement of the optical fiber due to the vibration of the light guide member fluctuation device. The above is considered desirable.
また、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,thは、後述する光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°であるため、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°以上であることが望ましい。
Further, since the driving strength threshold width ΔI mod, th is 10 ° when the optical fiber to be described later is twisted, the driving strength amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more when the optical fiber is twisted. It is desirable to be.
また、後述する屈折率モジュレータ(電気光学素子、音響光学素子)の屈折率変化をスペックルモジュレータとして活用する場合は、屈折率モジュレータを通過すると1波長(位相にして2π)に相当する変化が、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,thに相当すると考えられる。すなわち、光波長をλ、屈折率変調部の光軸上の長さをLm、屈折率をn、屈折率の変化量をΔnとすると、Lm・Δn/n/λc≧1で変調することが望ましい。従って、屈折率モジュレータの導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、屈折率モジュレータの屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmであることが望ましい。典型的な例として、Lm=5mm、λc=0.5μmとすると、屈折率の変化量としては、0.01%程度に相当する。
[スペックルモジュレータの効果をまとめて議論するための用語の定義]
〈Imod:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度〉
具体的には、レーザの実効的な光スペクトル幅を拡大または光波長をシフトを起こすためのレーザの波長変調回路の駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路の途中に配置される光位相モジュレータの駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路として光ファイバーを使う場合の光路上の光位相を変化させるための機械的な曲げ強度、印加応力強度、曲げ強度などを意味する。
〈Imod,0:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅〉
スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時に、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の最大値をImod,max、最小値をImod.minをとすると、Imod,0=Imod,max-Imod.minとなる。
〈tmod:スペックル変調周期〉
スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の時間周期である。
〈ΔImod:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅〉
撮像システムでは、ひとつの撮像フレーム内でのイメージャの露光期間内(またはイメージャの光蓄積期間内)でのスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅とする。イメージャを持たない照明装置では、生体の画像変化に対する応答時間と考えられる時間内(生体が人間の場合は33msecとする)でのスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅とする。
〈ΔImod,th:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度しきい幅〉
スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度を増加させていったときに、スペックル低減効果が飽和するための駆動強度の変化幅である。
〈M0:変調振幅因子〉
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,th
〈Meff:実効的変調振幅因子〉
Meff=ΔImod/ΔImod,th
Meffはスペックル低減効果と正の相関があるので、これをスペックル低減効果の指標とすることができる。尚、単一のスペックル低減メカニズムを動作させる場合においては、Meff≧1ではスペックル低減効果はほぼ飽和する。 In addition, when a refractive index change of a refractive index modulator (electro-optic element, acoustooptic element) described later is used as a speckle modulator, a change corresponding to one wavelength (2π in phase) passes through the refractive index modulator. This is considered to correspond to the drive strength threshold width ΔI mod, th . That is, if the optical wavelength is λ, the length on the optical axis of the refractive index modulator is Lm, the refractive index is n, and the amount of change in the refractive index is Δn, modulation can be performed with Lm · Δn / n / λc ≧ 1. desirable. Therefore, when the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the speckle modulator driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is refracted. It is desirable that Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm as the refractive index change of the refractive index modulator. As a typical example, if Lm = 5 mm and λc = 0.5 μm, the amount of change in refractive index corresponds to about 0.01%.
[Definition of terms used to discuss the effects of speckle modulators together]
<I mod : Drive strength of speckle modulator>
Specifically, the drive intensity of the laser wavelength modulation circuit for expanding the effective optical spectrum width of the laser or shifting the optical wavelength, and the optical phase arranged in the middle of the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target It means the driving strength of the modulator, the mechanical bending strength, applied stress strength, bending strength, etc. for changing the optical phase on the optical path when an optical fiber is used as the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target.
<I mod, 0 : Drive strength amplitude of speckle modulator>
When the speckle modulator is driven periodically, the maximum value of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is set to I mod, max and the minimum value is set to I mod. Let min be I mod, 0 = I mod, max -I mod. min .
<T mod : speckle modulation period>
This is the time period when the speckle modulator is driven periodically.
<ΔI mod : Width of change in driving strength of speckle modulator>
In the imaging system, the width of change in the driving intensity of the speckle modulator within the exposure period of the imager (or within the light accumulation period of the imager) within one imaging frame is used. In a lighting device that does not have an imager, the change width of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is within a time period that is considered to be a response time to an image change of a living body (33 msec if the living body is a human).
<ΔI mod, th : Drive strength threshold width of speckle modulator>
This is the range of change in drive strength for saturating the speckle reduction effect when the drive strength of the speckle modulator is increased.
<M 0 : Modulation amplitude factor>
M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th
<M eff : Effective modulation amplitude factor>
M eff = ΔI mod / ΔI mod, th
Since M eff has a positive correlation with the speckle reduction effect, this can be used as an index of the speckle reduction effect. In the case of operating a single speckle reduction mechanism, the speckle reduction effect is almost saturated when M eff ≧ 1.
[スペックルモジュレータの効果をまとめて議論するための用語の定義]
〈Imod:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度〉
具体的には、レーザの実効的な光スペクトル幅を拡大または光波長をシフトを起こすためのレーザの波長変調回路の駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路の途中に配置される光位相モジュレータの駆動強度、光源から観察対象に導光する光路として光ファイバーを使う場合の光路上の光位相を変化させるための機械的な曲げ強度、印加応力強度、曲げ強度などを意味する。
〈Imod,0:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅〉
スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時に、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の最大値をImod,max、最小値をImod.minをとすると、Imod,0=Imod,max-Imod.minとなる。
〈tmod:スペックル変調周期〉
スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の時間周期である。
〈ΔImod:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅〉
撮像システムでは、ひとつの撮像フレーム内でのイメージャの露光期間内(またはイメージャの光蓄積期間内)でのスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅とする。イメージャを持たない照明装置では、生体の画像変化に対する応答時間と考えられる時間内(生体が人間の場合は33msecとする)でのスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅とする。
〈ΔImod,th:スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度しきい幅〉
スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度を増加させていったときに、スペックル低減効果が飽和するための駆動強度の変化幅である。
〈M0:変調振幅因子〉
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,th
〈Meff:実効的変調振幅因子〉
Meff=ΔImod/ΔImod,th
Meffはスペックル低減効果と正の相関があるので、これをスペックル低減効果の指標とすることができる。尚、単一のスペックル低減メカニズムを動作させる場合においては、Meff≧1ではスペックル低減効果はほぼ飽和する。 In addition, when a refractive index change of a refractive index modulator (electro-optic element, acoustooptic element) described later is used as a speckle modulator, a change corresponding to one wavelength (2π in phase) passes through the refractive index modulator. This is considered to correspond to the drive strength threshold width ΔI mod, th . That is, if the optical wavelength is λ, the length on the optical axis of the refractive index modulator is Lm, the refractive index is n, and the amount of change in the refractive index is Δn, modulation can be performed with Lm · Δn / n / λc ≧ 1. desirable. Therefore, when the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the speckle modulator driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is refracted. It is desirable that Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm as the refractive index change of the refractive index modulator. As a typical example, if Lm = 5 mm and λc = 0.5 μm, the amount of change in refractive index corresponds to about 0.01%.
[Definition of terms used to discuss the effects of speckle modulators together]
<I mod : Drive strength of speckle modulator>
Specifically, the drive intensity of the laser wavelength modulation circuit for expanding the effective optical spectrum width of the laser or shifting the optical wavelength, and the optical phase arranged in the middle of the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target It means the driving strength of the modulator, the mechanical bending strength, applied stress strength, bending strength, etc. for changing the optical phase on the optical path when an optical fiber is used as the optical path guided from the light source to the observation target.
<I mod, 0 : Drive strength amplitude of speckle modulator>
When the speckle modulator is driven periodically, the maximum value of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is set to I mod, max and the minimum value is set to I mod. Let min be I mod, 0 = I mod, max -I mod. min .
<T mod : speckle modulation period>
This is the time period when the speckle modulator is driven periodically.
<ΔI mod : Width of change in driving strength of speckle modulator>
In the imaging system, the width of change in the driving intensity of the speckle modulator within the exposure period of the imager (or within the light accumulation period of the imager) within one imaging frame is used. In a lighting device that does not have an imager, the change width of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is within a time period that is considered to be a response time to an image change of a living body (33 msec if the living body is a human).
<ΔI mod, th : Drive strength threshold width of speckle modulator>
This is the range of change in drive strength for saturating the speckle reduction effect when the drive strength of the speckle modulator is increased.
<M 0 : Modulation amplitude factor>
M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th
<M eff : Effective modulation amplitude factor>
M eff = ΔI mod / ΔI mod, th
Since M eff has a positive correlation with the speckle reduction effect, this can be used as an index of the speckle reduction effect. In the case of operating a single speckle reduction mechanism, the speckle reduction effect is almost saturated when M eff ≧ 1.
図3A1と図3A2、図3B1と図3B2、図3C1と図3C2は、前述の撮像、照明、変調のタイミングに対して、「スペックルモジュレータの駆動振幅」と「Meffおよびスペックル低減効果」の関係を説明したものであり、図3A1と図3A2はM0<1の場合、図3B1と図3B2はM0=1の場合、図3C1と図3C2はM0=2>1の場合を示している。また、図3A1と図3A2、図3B1と図3B2、図3C1と図3C2において、上段は、経過時間に対するスペックルモジュレータの駆動波形を示しており、中段は、これと最適に同期された照明パルス生成器の照射波形を時間軸で示したものており、下段は、スペックル低減効果の指標となるMeffおよびスペックル低減効果を照明パルス生成器の照射タイミングの中心時刻に対して示している。ここで、Meffは、照射タイミングの中心時刻における照射波形の積分値に対応している。更に、図3A1と図3B1と図3C1は、照射波形のパルス幅(すなわちパルス発光期間)tpw,illがスペックルモジュレータの変調周期の半分の期間よりも短い場合(tmod/2>tpw,ill)、図3A2と図3B2と図3C2は、照射波形のパルス幅(すなわちパルス発光期間)tpw,illがスペックルモジュレータの変調周期の半分の期間と等しい場合(tmod/2=tpw,ill)を示している。尚、図3A1と図3A2、図3B1と図3B2、図3C1と図3C2において、スペックル低減効果の数値は、スペックルコントラストの逆数に比例し、かつ、スペックルモジュレータによるスペックル低減効果が最大となるスペックルコントラストで規格化して示している。このため、スペックル低減効果の数値はスペックルモジュレータによる低減効果が飽和して最大となる条件で1となるようにプロットしている。
3A1 and 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2 are “the speckle modulator driving amplitude”, “M eff and speckle reduction effect” with respect to the above-described imaging, illumination, and modulation timings. 3A1 and 3A2 show the case where M 0 <1, FIGS. 3B1 and 3B2 show the case where M 0 = 1, and FIGS. 3C1 and 3C2 show the case where M 0 = 2> 1. Show. 3A1 and 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2, the upper part shows the driving waveform of the speckle modulator with respect to the elapsed time, and the middle part shows the illumination pulse optimally synchronized with this. The irradiation waveform of the generator is shown on the time axis, and the lower part shows M eff as an index of the speckle reduction effect and the speckle reduction effect with respect to the central time of the irradiation timing of the illumination pulse generator. . Here, M eff corresponds to the integrated value of the irradiation waveform at the central time of the irradiation timing. Furthermore, Figure 3A1 and Figure 3B1 and Figure 3C1, the pulse width (or pulse emission period) of the irradiation waveform t pw, if ill is shorter than half the period of the modulation period of the speckle modulator (t mod / 2> t pw , Ill), FIG. 3A2, FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C2 show the case where the pulse width of the irradiation waveform (ie, the pulse emission period) t pw, ill is equal to half of the modulation period of the speckle modulator (t mod / 2 = t pw, ill ). 3A1 and 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2, 3C1 and 3C2, the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is proportional to the reciprocal of the speckle contrast, and the speckle reduction effect by the speckle modulator is maximum. It is shown normalized by speckle contrast. Therefore, the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is plotted so as to be 1 under the condition that the reduction effect by the speckle modulator is saturated and maximized.
上記説明を通じて、イメージャの露光のタイミングは照射タイミングと同期していることが望ましく、露光期間は照射期間の少なくとも一部、望ましくは全てを含む必要がある。(必ずしも同期していなくてもよい。たとえばtpw,expの間に複数回の照射パルスがあるような関係が成り立てば、同期していなくてもスペックル低減効果は得られる。)
Through the above description, the exposure timing of the imager is preferably synchronized with the irradiation timing, and the exposure period needs to include at least a part of the irradiation period, preferably all. (It is not always necessary to synchronize. For example , if there is a relationship in which there are a plurality of irradiation pulses between tpw and exp, a speckle reduction effect can be obtained even if they are not synchronized.)
逆にイメージャの露光期間でPWMをかけるときには、図3A1と図3A2、図3B1と図3B2、図3C1と図3C2を通して、光源の発光期間tpw,illをイメージャの露光期間tpw,expと読み替えることで、同様のスペックル低減効果を得ることができる。この場合は逆にtpw,illはtpw,expの一部または全てを含む必要があることは言うまでもない。
Conversely, when PWM is applied during the exposure period of the imager, the light emission period tpw , ill of the light source is read as the exposure period tpw, exp of the imager through FIGS. 3A1 and 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2, and 3C1 and 3C2. Thus, the same speckle reduction effect can be obtained. In this case, on the contrary, it is needless to say that t pw, ill needs to include a part or all of t pw, exp .
後述する図4A1と図4A2、図4B1と図4B2、図4C1と図4C2についても同じことが言える。
The same can be said for FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG.
図3A1と図3A2、図3B1と図3B2、図3C1と図3C2よりわかることをまとめると以下のように整理される。
・M0やMeffを大きくするようにスペックルモジュレータの駆動振幅や駆動幅を大きくすると、スペックル低減効果が単調に高まる。
・時間軸で言えば、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが大きくなるようにスペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させるとスペックル低減効果が最大となる。
・Meff≧1とすることで、撮像、照明、変調のタイミングを最適化すれば、スペックル低減効果を最大に高められる。また、Meff≧1となる条件では、スペックル低減効果が飽和し、撮像、照明、変調のタイミング依存性が小さく、安定なスペックル低減効果が得られる。 3A1 and FIG. 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2 are summarized as follows.
· M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of the speckle modulator so as to increase the M eff, speckle reduction effect is enhanced monotonous.
Speaking on the time axis, the speckle reduction effect is maximized when the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator are synchronized so that the change width ΔI mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is increased.
By setting M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation. Further, under the condition of M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
・M0やMeffを大きくするようにスペックルモジュレータの駆動振幅や駆動幅を大きくすると、スペックル低減効果が単調に高まる。
・時間軸で言えば、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが大きくなるようにスペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させるとスペックル低減効果が最大となる。
・Meff≧1とすることで、撮像、照明、変調のタイミングを最適化すれば、スペックル低減効果を最大に高められる。また、Meff≧1となる条件では、スペックル低減効果が飽和し、撮像、照明、変調のタイミング依存性が小さく、安定なスペックル低減効果が得られる。 3A1 and FIG. 3A2, FIG. 3B1 and FIG. 3B2, and FIG. 3C1 and FIG. 3C2 are summarized as follows.
· M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of the speckle modulator so as to increase the M eff, speckle reduction effect is enhanced monotonous.
Speaking on the time axis, the speckle reduction effect is maximized when the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator are synchronized so that the change width ΔI mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is increased.
By setting M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation. Further, under the condition of M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
このため、スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと照明のタイミング、撮像のタイミングを適正化してMeffを大きくし、スペックル低減効果を十分に引き出すために同期コントローラを設ける。ここで、照明のタイミングとは、照明パルス生成器で生成されるパルス発光期間の時間的なタイミングを意味し、撮像のタイミングとはひとつの撮像フレーム内でのイメージャの受光タイミングを意味する。
For this reason, a synchronous controller is provided in order to optimize the drive timing of the speckle modulator, the timing of illumination, and the timing of imaging to increase M eff and sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect. Here, the illumination timing means the temporal timing of the pulse emission period generated by the illumination pulse generator, and the imaging timing means the light reception timing of the imager within one imaging frame.
上記で説明した撮像のタイミング、照明のタイミング、スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを最適化するための同期制御をする方法としては、1)撮像のタイミングをマスター時刻として、これに照明のタイミングとスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、2)照明のタイミングをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミングおよびスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、3)スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミングおよびスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、4)照明装置や撮像システムのシステムクロックをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミング、照明のタイミング、スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させる方法など、多様な同期方法が適用可能である。
As a method of performing the synchronous control for optimizing the imaging timing, the illumination timing, and the speckle modulator driving timing described above, 1) the imaging timing is set as the master time, and the illumination timing and speckle are used as the master time. A method of synchronizing the modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing, 2) A method of synchronizing an imaging timing and a speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing with the illumination timing as a master time, and 3) A speckle modulator A method of synchronizing the driving timing as the master time with the imaging timing and the speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing. 4) The system clock of the illumination device or the imaging system as the master time, and the imaging timing. Timing, the timing of the illumination, and a method for synchronizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator is a method diverse synchronization can be applied.
また、撮像の周期(フレームレート)1/fr、照明パルスの発生周期tp、スペックルモジュレータの駆動周期tmodは、これらの同期が可能であれば、必ずしも同じである必要はない。
Further, the imaging cycle (frame rate) 1 / f r , the illumination pulse generation cycle t p , and the speckle modulator drive cycle t mod are not necessarily the same as long as they can be synchronized.
図4A1と図4A2、図4B1と図4B2、図4C1と図4C2は、前述の撮像、照明、変調のタイミングやスペックルモジュレータの変調振幅因子M0をパラメータとして、「スペックルモジュレータの変調速度とMeffおよびスペックル低減効果」の関係を説明したものであり、図4A1と図4A2は、スペックルモジュレータの変調速度が比較的遅く、tmod/2M0>tpw,illの場合、図4B1と図4B2は、スペックルモジュレータの変調速度がちょうどtmod/2M0=tpw,illの場合、図4C1と図4C2は、スペックルモジュレータの変調速度が比較的速く、tmod/M0=tpw,illの場合を示している。また、図4A1と図4A2、図4B1と図4B2、図4C1と図4C2において、上段は、経過時間に対するスペックルモジュレータの駆動波形を示しており、中段は、照明パルス生成器の照射波形を時間軸で示しており、下段は、スペックル低減効果の指標となる実効的変調振幅因子Meffおよびスペックル低減効果を照明パルス生成器の照射タイミングに対して示している。ここで、図4A1と図4B1と図4C1はスペックルモジュレータの変調振幅因子M0=1の場合を、図4A2と図4B2と図4C2はスペックルモジュレータの変調振幅因子M0=2>1の場合を示している。尚、図4A1と図4A2、図4B1と図4B2、図4C1と図4C2において、スペックル低減効果の数値は、スペックルコントラストの逆数に比例し、かつ、スペックルモジュレータによるスペックル低減効果が最大となるスペックルコントラストで規格化して示している。このため、スペックル低減効果の数値はスペックルモジュレータによる低減効果が飽和して最大となる条件で1となるようにプロットしている。
Figure 4A1 and Figure 4A2, Figure 4B1 and Figure 4B2, Figure 4C1 and Figure 4C2, the imaging described above, the illumination, the modulation amplitude factor M 0 of the timing and speckle modulator of the modulation as a parameter, a modulation rate of "speckle modulator FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2 illustrate the relationship between “M eff and speckle reduction effect”. FIG. 4A1 and FIG. 4A2 illustrate a case where the modulation rate of the speckle modulator is relatively slow and t mod / 2M 0 > t pw, ill . 4B2 shows that when the modulation rate of the speckle modulator is just t mod / 2M 0 = t pw, ill , FIGS. 4C1 and 4C2 show that the modulation rate of the speckle modulator is relatively high and t mod / M 0 = The case of tpw, ill is shown. 4A1 and 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG. 4C2, the upper part shows the driving waveform of the speckle modulator with respect to the elapsed time, and the middle part shows the irradiation waveform of the illumination pulse generator in time. The lower part shows the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff and the speckle reduction effect as an index of the speckle reduction effect with respect to the irradiation timing of the illumination pulse generator. Here, FIGS. 4A1, 4B1, and 4C1 show the case where the modulation amplitude factor M 0 = 1 of the speckle modulator, and FIGS. 4A2, 4B2, and 4C2 show that the modulation amplitude factor M 0 = 2> 1 of the speckle modulator. Shows the case. In FIGS. 4A1 and 4A2, 4B1 and 4B2, and 4C1 and 4C2, the value of the speckle reduction effect is proportional to the reciprocal of the speckle contrast, and the speckle reduction effect by the speckle modulator is maximum. It is shown normalized by speckle contrast. Therefore, the numerical value of the speckle reduction effect is plotted so as to be 1 under the condition that the reduction effect by the speckle modulator is saturated and maximized.
図4A1と図4A2、図4B1と図4B2、図4C1と図4C2よりわかることをまとめると以下のように整理される。
・tmod>2M0tpw,illの場合でも、スペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させるとスペックル低減効果を最も効率的に引き出せる。但し、Meff<1の場合には、スペックル低減効果が飽和するほど低減することはできない。
・スペックルモジュレータをM0≧1で駆動することにより、tmod<2tpw,illになるような高速でスペックルモジュレータを駆動しなくても、これよりM0倍遅い条件(tmod≦2M0tpw,ill)でも、スペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させることで、スペックル低減効果が飽和する最大レベルの効果を引き出せる。
・スペックルモジュレータをM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦M0tpw,illの場合は、同期制御のタイミングにあまり依存せず、スペックル低減効果は安定に最大に近い値にすることができる。 4A1 and 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG. 4C2 are summarized as follows.
Even when t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill , the speckle reduction effect can be most efficiently brought out by synchronizing the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator. However, when M eff <1, it cannot be reduced as the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
By driving the speckle modulator with M 0 ≧ 1, even if the speckle modulator is not driven at a high speed such that t mod <2t pw, ill , the condition is M 0 times slower than this (t mod ≦ 2M Even at 0 t pw, ill ), by synchronizing the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator, it is possible to bring out the maximum level effect at which the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
・ When speckle modulator is driven at M 0 ≧ 1 and t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, ill , it does not depend much on the timing of synchronous control, and the speckle reduction effect is stable and close to the maximum value. can do.
・tmod>2M0tpw,illの場合でも、スペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させるとスペックル低減効果を最も効率的に引き出せる。但し、Meff<1の場合には、スペックル低減効果が飽和するほど低減することはできない。
・スペックルモジュレータをM0≧1で駆動することにより、tmod<2tpw,illになるような高速でスペックルモジュレータを駆動しなくても、これよりM0倍遅い条件(tmod≦2M0tpw,ill)でも、スペックルモジュレータと照明パルス生成器を同期させることで、スペックル低減効果が飽和する最大レベルの効果を引き出せる。
・スペックルモジュレータをM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦M0tpw,illの場合は、同期制御のタイミングにあまり依存せず、スペックル低減効果は安定に最大に近い値にすることができる。 4A1 and 4A2, FIG. 4B1 and FIG. 4B2, and FIG. 4C1 and FIG. 4C2 are summarized as follows.
Even when t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill , the speckle reduction effect can be most efficiently brought out by synchronizing the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator. However, when M eff <1, it cannot be reduced as the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
By driving the speckle modulator with M 0 ≧ 1, even if the speckle modulator is not driven at a high speed such that t mod <2t pw, ill , the condition is M 0 times slower than this (t mod ≦ 2M Even at 0 t pw, ill ), by synchronizing the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator, it is possible to bring out the maximum level effect at which the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
・ When speckle modulator is driven at M 0 ≧ 1 and t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, ill , it does not depend much on the timing of synchronous control, and the speckle reduction effect is stable and close to the maximum value. can do.
変調振幅因子M0の概念を考慮しない従来の考え方では、tmod<tpw,illでなければスペックル低減効果を最大かつ時間的な変動なしにできないと考えられるが、M0倍だけスペックルモジュレータの変調速度を遅くしても(あるいは、パルス発光期間をM0倍だけ短くしても)スペックル低減効果は安定かつ最大にすることができる。
In the conventional way of thinking that does not consider the concept of the modulation amplitude factor M 0 , it is considered that the speckle reduction effect cannot be achieved without maximum and temporal fluctuation unless t mod <t pw, ill , but the speckle is only M 0 times. Even if the modulation speed of the modulator is decreased (or the pulse emission period is shortened by M 0 times), the speckle reduction effect can be stabilized and maximized.
上述のように、スペックルモジュレータの駆動周期tmodやタイミングは、照明装置においては、パルス発光期間tpw,illやそのタイミングによりスペックル低減効果が大きく影響される。同様に、スペックルモジュレータの駆動周期tmodやタイミングは、イメージャを有する撮像システムにおいては、露光期間tpw,expやそのタイミングによりスペックル低減効果が大きく影響される。
As described above, the speckle modulator driving cycle t mod and timing are greatly affected by the speckle reduction effect by the pulse emission period tpw, ill and its timing in the lighting device. Similarly, in the imaging system having an imager, the speckle reduction effect is greatly affected by the exposure period tpw, exp and the timing of the speckle modulator driving cycle t mod and timing.
従って、以下の実施形態で、パルス発光期間は全て、パルス発光期間またはイメージャの露光期間tpw,expまたはそれらの重なり部分のどれに読み替えても成立する。
Therefore, in the following embodiments, the pulse emission period is all established even if it is read as either the pulse emission period or the exposure period tpw, exp of the imager or their overlapping portions.
[第1実施形態]
図5は、第1実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。 [First Embodiment]
FIG. 5 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including the imaging system according to the first embodiment.
図5は、第1実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。 [First Embodiment]
FIG. 5 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including the imaging system according to the first embodiment.
内視鏡システム300は、内視鏡スコープ部310と内視鏡コントローラ部320から構成されている。内視鏡スコープ部310と内視鏡コントローラ部320は、スコープ部コネクタ312とコントローラ部コネクタ322により連結されている。
The endoscope system 300 includes an endoscope scope unit 310 and an endoscope controller unit 320. The endoscope scope unit 310 and the endoscope controller unit 320 are connected by a scope unit connector 312 and a controller unit connector 322.
本実施形態に係る撮像システム100は、観察対象190を照明する照明装置102と、照明装置102によって照明された観察対象190を撮像する撮像装置104を備えている。
The imaging system 100 according to the present embodiment includes the illumination device 102 that illuminates the observation target 190 and the imaging device 104 that captures the observation target 190 illuminated by the illumination device 102.
図5において、内視鏡スコープ部310と内視鏡コントローラ部320を連結するスコープ部コネクタ312とコントローラ部コネクタ322はそれぞれ一体として描かれているが、照明装置102の内視鏡スコープ部310側と内視鏡コントローラ部320側、及び撮像装置104の内視鏡スコープ部310側と内視鏡コントローラ部320側は、それぞれ別体のコネクタにより連結されていてもよい。
In FIG. 5, the scope connector 312 and the controller connector 322 that connect the endoscope scope unit 310 and the endoscope controller unit 320 are depicted as one piece, but the endoscope scope unit 310 side of the illumination device 102 is illustrated. The endoscope controller unit 320 side, and the endoscope scope unit 310 side and the endoscope controller unit 320 side of the imaging device 104 may be connected by separate connectors.
照明装置102は、コヒーレント光の照明光を生成する照明光生成器110と、照明光生成器110から射出されたコヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系120と、導光光学系120によって導光されたコヒーレント光の配光を調整して射出する配光光学系140を備えている。
The illuminating device 102 includes an illumination light generator 110 that generates illumination light of coherent light, a light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a light guide by the light guide optical system 120. A light distribution optical system 140 that adjusts and emits the light distribution of the coherent light that is generated is provided.
照明光生成器110は、コヒーレント光であるレーザ光を発するレーザ光源112と、レーザ光源112を駆動するドライバ114を備えている。照明光生成器110は、例えば、コヒーレント光の所定のパルス発光期間tpw,illの照明パルスを生成する照明パルス生成器で構成されている。以下の説明において、特に断りがない限り、照明光生成器110は照明パルス生成器で構成されているものとする。
The illumination light generator 110 includes a laser light source 112 that emits laser light that is coherent light, and a driver 114 that drives the laser light source 112. For example, the illumination light generator 110 includes an illumination pulse generator that generates illumination pulses of a predetermined pulse emission period tpw, ill of coherent light. In the following description, it is assumed that the illumination light generator 110 is composed of an illumination pulse generator unless otherwise specified.
導光光学系120は、コヒーレント光を導光する導光部材として第1の光ファイバー124と第2の光ファイバー130を備えている。導光部材は、光ファイバーに限られるものではなく、これに代えて、例えば可撓性導波路が適用されてもよい。導光光学系120はまた、レーザ光源112から発せられたコヒーレント光を光ファイバー124に結合する第1のファイバー結合レンズ122と、第1の光ファイバー124から射出された光ビームをコリメートするコリメートレンズ126と、コリメートレンズ126によってコリメートされた光ビームを第2の光ファイバー130に結合する第2のファイバー結合レンズ128を備えている。第1のファイバー結合レンズ122とコリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128は、図5では模式的に1枚のレンズとして描かれているが、実際には、1枚のレンズで構成されていてもよいし、複数枚のレンズから構成されていてもよい。
The light guide optical system 120 includes a first optical fiber 124 and a second optical fiber 130 as light guide members for guiding coherent light. The light guide member is not limited to an optical fiber, and instead, for example, a flexible waveguide may be applied. The light guiding optical system 120 also includes a first fiber coupling lens 122 that couples coherent light emitted from the laser light source 112 to the optical fiber 124, and a collimating lens 126 that collimates the light beam emitted from the first optical fiber 124. , A second fiber coupling lens 128 for coupling the light beam collimated by the collimating lens 126 to the second optical fiber 130 is provided. Although the first fiber coupling lens 122, the collimating lens 126, and the second fiber coupling lens 128 are schematically depicted as one lens in FIG. 5, they are actually composed of one lens. Alternatively, it may be composed of a plurality of lenses.
撮像装置104は、所定の露光期間tpw,expで撮像を行うイメージャ150と、イメージャ150によって取得された画像情報に対して必要な画像処理を行う画像処理回路160と、画像処理回路160によって画像処理された画像を表示するディスプレイ170を備えている。
The imaging device 104 includes an imager 150 that captures images in predetermined exposure periods tpw and exp , an image processing circuit 160 that performs necessary image processing on image information acquired by the imager 150, and an image that is processed by the image processing circuit 160. A display 170 is provided for displaying the processed image.
レーザ光源112から出射したレーザ光は、第1のファイバー結合レンズ122によって集光されて第1の光ファイバー124に入射し、第1の光ファイバー124によって導光される。第1の光ファイバー124から射出されたレーザ光のビームは、コリメートレンズ126によって平行な光ビームに変換されて空間内を伝搬し、第2のファイバー結合レンズ128によって集光されて第2の光ファイバー130に入射し、第2の光ファイバー130によって導光される。導光光学系120によって導光されたレーザ光は、配光光学系140によって配光が調整されて射出される。配光光学系140から射出された光L1は、観察対象190に照射される。
The laser light emitted from the laser light source 112 is condensed by the first fiber coupling lens 122, enters the first optical fiber 124, and is guided by the first optical fiber 124. The beam of laser light emitted from the first optical fiber 124 is converted into a parallel light beam by the collimating lens 126 and propagates in the space, and is collected by the second fiber coupling lens 128 and condensed by the second optical fiber 130. And is guided by the second optical fiber 130. The laser light guided by the light guide optical system 120 is emitted after the light distribution is adjusted by the light distribution optical system 140. The light L1 emitted from the light distribution optical system 140 is applied to the observation object 190.
観察対象190に照射された光L1は、観察対象190によって反射、回折、散乱等される。観察対象190によって反射、回折、散乱等された光の一部L2は、イメージャ150に入射する。イメージャ150は、観察対象190から受けた光L2に基づいて、観察対象190の画像情報を取得する。イメージャ150によって取得された画像情報は、画像処理回路160によって画像処理が行われた後、ディスプレイ170に表示される。
The light L1 irradiated to the observation object 190 is reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190. A part L 2 of the light reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190 enters the imager 150. The imager 150 acquires image information of the observation object 190 based on the light L2 received from the observation object 190. The image information acquired by the imager 150 is displayed on the display 170 after image processing is performed by the image processing circuit 160.
コヒーレント光を使った撮像システムでは、観察対象に僅かな凹凸等の散乱構造があると、イメージャの撮像面においてスペックルが発生し、取得した画像にスペックルノイズとして現れる。この現象は、電子的な撮像システムに限ったものではなく、撮像面に相当する生体の網膜上でも発生するため、コヒーレント光を使った照明装置においても同様の問題が発生する。スペックルの発生原因は、観察対象の凹凸等から散乱した光が干渉し、撮像面や網膜上に細かな明暗のパターンが形成されるためである。
In an imaging system using coherent light, if the observation target has a scattering structure such as slight unevenness, speckles are generated on the imaging surface of the imager and appear as speckle noise in the acquired image. This phenomenon is not limited to an electronic imaging system, but also occurs on the retina of a living body corresponding to the imaging surface, and the same problem occurs in an illumination device using coherent light. The cause of speckle is that light scattered from the unevenness of the observation target interferes, and a fine light-dark pattern is formed on the imaging surface and the retina.
このスペックルノイズを低減するため、照明装置102は、コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータ200を備えている。
In order to reduce this speckle noise, the illumination device 102 includes a speckle modulator 200 that modulates speckle generated by coherent light.
スペックルモジュレータ200は、例えば、導光光学系120によって導光されるコヒーレント光の光学特性を変化させる導光特性モジュレータで構成されてよい。または、スペックルモジュレータ200は、コヒーレント光の光学特性を変化させる波長モジュレータで構成されてもよい。
The speckle modulator 200 may be configured by, for example, a light guide characteristic modulator that changes the optical characteristics of coherent light guided by the light guide optical system 120. Or the speckle modulator 200 may be comprised with the wavelength modulator which changes the optical characteristic of coherent light.
導光特性モジュレータは、例えば、導光光学系120によって導光されるコヒーレント光の位相を時間的に変化させる位相モジュレータで構成されてよい。位相モジュレータは、例えば、コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系120に含まれる導光部材に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置で構成されてよい。導光部材に加える機械的な変動は、例えば、振動や、回転または捻りであってよい。または、位相モジュレータは、コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系120の一部の屈折率を時間的に変化させる屈折率モジュレータで構成されてもよい。屈折率モジュレータは、例えば、電気光学素子または音響光学素子を有していてよい。位相モジュレータはまた、例えば、コヒーレント光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸板を有していてよい。または、位相モジュレータは、照明光生成器110が射出するコヒーレント光の波長を時間的に変化させる波長モジュレータで構成されてもよい。
The light guide characteristic modulator may be composed of a phase modulator that temporally changes the phase of coherent light guided by the light guide optical system 120, for example. For example, the phase modulator may include a light guide member changing device that mechanically changes the light guide member included in the light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light. The mechanical variation applied to the light guide member may be, for example, vibration, rotation, or twist. Alternatively, the phase modulator may be configured by a refractive index modulator that temporally changes the refractive index of a part of the light guide optical system 120 that guides coherent light. The refractive index modulator may include, for example, an electro-optic element or an acousto-optic element. The phase modulator may also include a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light, for example. Alternatively, the phase modulator may be composed of a wavelength modulator that temporally changes the wavelength of coherent light emitted from the illumination light generator 110.
本実施形態では、スペックルモジュレータ200は、第1の光ファイバー124の両端の間の中間部に配置された第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間のコリメートされた光ビームの光路上に配置された第2の導光特性モジュレータ220を備えている。スペックルモジュレータ200はまた、レーザ光源112が発するレーザ光の波長を時間的に変化させる波長モジュレータ230を備えている。
In the present embodiment, the speckle modulator 200 includes a first light guide characteristic modulator 210 disposed at an intermediate portion between both ends of the first optical fiber 124, and between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128. The second light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam. The speckle modulator 200 also includes a wavelength modulator 230 that temporally changes the wavelength of the laser light emitted from the laser light source 112.
波長モジュレータ230は、波長可変なレーザ光源112と、レーザ光源112が発するレーザ光の波長を時間的に変化させるようにレーザ光源112を制御する波長変調回路232とから構成されている。第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と第2の導光特性モジュレータ220の構成については図6A~図6Dを参照しつつ後述する。
The wavelength modulator 230 includes a wavelength-variable laser light source 112 and a wavelength modulation circuit 232 that controls the laser light source 112 so as to temporally change the wavelength of the laser light emitted from the laser light source 112. The configurations of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210 and the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D.
スペックルモジュレータ200は、必ずしも、第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と第2の導光特性モジュレータ220と波長モジュレータ230のすべてを備えている必要はなく、それらの少なくともひとつを備えていればよい。
The speckle modulator 200 does not necessarily need to include all of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and the wavelength modulator 230, and may include at least one of them.
照明装置102はまた、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングを同期させて照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する同期コントローラ240を備えている。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングと、第1の導光特性モジュレータ210および/または第2の導光特性モジュレータ220の駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する。さらに、同期コントローラ240は、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングとイメージャ150の撮像タイミングを同期させて照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200とイメージャ150を制御することも可能である。
The illumination device 102 also includes a synchronization controller 240 that controls the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 by synchronizing the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200. For example, the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the drive timing of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210 and / or the second light guide characteristic modulator 220 in synchronization. Furthermore, the synchronization controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110, the speckle modulator 200, and the imager 150 by synchronizing the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150. It is also possible.
同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0や照明光生成器110のパルス発光期間tpw,illに制約があっても、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングと照明のタイミングと撮像のタイミングを適正化してMeffを大きくし、スペックル低減効果を十分に引き出すために設けられている。
Even if there is a restriction on the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 and the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110, the synchronous controller 240 determines the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination timing. It is provided in order to optimize the timing of imaging and increase M eff so that the speckle reduction effect can be sufficiently obtained.
ここで、照明のタイミングとは、照明光生成器110で生成されるパルス発光期間の時間的なタイミングを意味し、撮像のタイミングとは、ひとつの撮像フレーム内でのイメージャ150の受光タイミングを意味する。
Here, the illumination timing means the temporal timing of the pulse emission period generated by the illumination light generator 110, and the imaging timing means the light reception timing of the imager 150 within one imaging frame. To do.
上記で説明した撮像のタイミング、照明のタイミング、スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを最適化するための同期制御をする方法としては、1)撮像のタイミングをマスター時刻として、これに照明のタイミングとスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、2)照明のタイミングをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミングおよびスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、3)スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミングおよびスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを所定のタイミングで同期させる方法、4)照明装置や撮像システムのシステムクロックをマスター時刻として、これに撮像のタイミング、照明のタイミング、スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させる方法など、多様な同期方法が適用可能である。
As a method of performing the synchronous control for optimizing the imaging timing, the illumination timing, and the speckle modulator driving timing described above, 1) the imaging timing is set as the master time, and the illumination timing and speckle are used as the master time. A method of synchronizing the modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing, 2) A method of synchronizing an imaging timing and a speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing with the illumination timing as a master time, and 3) A speckle modulator A method of synchronizing the driving timing as the master time with the imaging timing and the speckle modulator driving timing at a predetermined timing. 4) The system clock of the illumination device or the imaging system as the master time, and the imaging timing. Timing, the timing of the illumination, and a method for synchronizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator is a method diverse synchronization can be applied.
また、撮像の周期(フレームレート)1/fr、照明パルスの発生周期tp、スペックルモジュレータの駆動周期tmodは、これらの同期が可能であれば、必ずしも同じである必要はない。例えば、nを自然数として、1/fr=2n・tp=2n・tmodとしたり、また、tp=2n・tmodとしたりして、互いの周期が整数倍の関係であっても適用可能である。(1フレームに複数の照明パルスを発生させる場合については第2実施形態で説明する。)
Further, the imaging cycle (frame rate) 1 / f r , the illumination pulse generation cycle t p , and the speckle modulator drive cycle t mod are not necessarily the same as long as they can be synchronized. For example, assuming that n is a natural number, 1 / f r = 2n · t p = 2n · t mod , or t p = 2n · t mod , so that the period of each is an integer multiple Applicable. (The case of generating a plurality of illumination pulses in one frame will be described in the second embodiment.)
なお、ここでは撮像システムを考え、複数の照明パルスはton内に分布するとしているが、イメージャを持たない照明装置(肉眼での観察のためのもの)においても複数パルス分割により所望の効果が得られる。この場合、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effは、もっとも広いパルス間隔の次の照明パルスの始点から最後の照明パルスの終点と定義できる。言い換えれば、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effは、ひとつの照明パルス群における最初の照明パルスの点灯時刻から最後の照明パルスの消灯時刻までの期間と言える。
Here, consider an imaging system, a plurality of illumination pulses are to be distributed in a t on, the desired effect by a plurality of pulses divided even in the illumination device having no imager (one for naked eye observation) can get. In this case, the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff can be defined as the end point of the last illumination pulse from the start point of the next illumination pulse with the widest pulse interval. In other words, the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff can be said to be a period from the lighting time of the first illumination pulse to the extinguishing time of the last illumination pulse in one illumination pulse group.
図6Aと図6Bと図6Cと図6Dは、スペックルモジュレータとして機能する導光特性モジュレータの構成例を示している。これらのうち、図6Aと図6Bは、光ファイバーの中間位置に配置された第1の導光特性モジュレータ210の構成例を示し、図6Cと図6Dは、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間の光路上に配置された第2の導光特性モジュレータ220の構成例を示している。
6A, FIG. 6B, FIG. 6C, and FIG. 6D show a configuration example of a light guide characteristic modulator that functions as a speckle modulator. Among these, FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show the structural example of the 1st light guide characteristic modulator 210 arrange | positioned in the intermediate position of an optical fiber, FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D show the collimating lens 126 and the 2nd fiber coupling lens. The example of a structure of the 2nd light guide characteristic modulator 220 arrange | positioned on the optical path between 128 is shown.
図6Aは、第1の光ファイバー124を振動させることにより、第1の光ファイバー124によって導光されるレーザ光の光学特性を変化させる導光特性モジュレータ210Aの構成を概略的に示している。
FIG. 6A schematically shows the configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 210A that changes the optical characteristics of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 by vibrating the first optical fiber 124.
導光特性モジュレータ210Aは、レーザ光を導光する第1の光ファイバー124に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置2110と、導光部材変動装置2110を駆動するドライバ2130を備えている。ここで、導光部材変動装置2110は、第1の光ファイバー124に振動を加える光ファイバー振動装置である。導光部材変動装置2110は、振動モーター2112を有している。振動モーター2112は、振動を吸収するダンパー2118の上に設置されている。ダンパー2118は、図示しない固定部材の上に設置されている。振動モーター2112の回転軸2114には、回転軸2114に対して非対称な重心を有する重り2116が取り付けられている。振動モーター2112には突き当て部材2120が固定されている。突き当て部材2120は第1の光ファイバー124に接している。
The light guide characteristic modulator 210A includes a light guide member changing device 2110 that mechanically changes the first optical fiber 124 that guides laser light, and a driver 2130 that drives the light guide member changing device 2110. Here, the light guide member fluctuation device 2110 is an optical fiber vibration device that applies vibration to the first optical fiber 124. The light guide member varying device 2110 has a vibration motor 2112. The vibration motor 2112 is installed on a damper 2118 that absorbs vibration. The damper 2118 is installed on a fixing member (not shown). A weight 2116 having a center of gravity asymmetric with respect to the rotation shaft 2114 is attached to the rotation shaft 2114 of the vibration motor 2112. An abutting member 2120 is fixed to the vibration motor 2112. The abutting member 2120 is in contact with the first optical fiber 124.
振動モーター2112は、電気配線2140を介してドライバ2130から電流の供給を受けると、回転軸2114が回転する。回転軸2114には、非対称な重心を有する重り2116が取り付けられているため、回転軸2114が回転すると、振動モーター2112が振動する。この振動は突き当て部材2120を介して光ファイバー124に伝達される。その結果、第1の光ファイバー124が振動される。これにより、第1の光ファイバー124の曲がりが周期的に変化するため、第1の光ファイバー124によって導光されるレーザ光の位相やモードが時間的に変化する。
When the vibration motor 2112 is supplied with a current from the driver 2130 via the electric wiring 2140, the rotation shaft 2114 rotates. Since the weight 2116 having an asymmetric center of gravity is attached to the rotation shaft 2114, the vibration motor 2112 vibrates when the rotation shaft 2114 rotates. This vibration is transmitted to the optical fiber 124 via the butting member 2120. As a result, the first optical fiber 124 is vibrated. Thereby, since the bending of the first optical fiber 124 changes periodically, the phase and mode of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 change with time.
導光特性モジュレータ210Aにおいて、好ましくは、第1の光ファイバー124のコア直径をΦcとすると、導光特性モジュレータ210Aの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、導光部材変動装置2110による第1の光ファイバー124の振動の変位にして5Φc以上である。
In the light guide characteristic modulator 210A, preferably, when the core diameter of the first optical fiber 124 is Φc, the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210A is equal to the first optical fiber 124 by the light guide member fluctuation device 2110. The vibration displacement is 5Φc or more.
尚、導光特性モジュレータ210Aの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、振動モーター2112の回転速度を高めることで、遠心力が増大することを利用して、振動振幅Xmod,0を大きくすることなどで、大きくすることが可能である。あるいは、振動モーター2112の回転軸2114の周りに弾性部材を介して重り2116を取り付けておくと、重り2116は、振動モーター2112の回転速度の上昇とともに、回転軸2114に対する重り2116の重心の非対称性が増すように構成される。このため、振動モーター2112の回転速度を上げると、更に振動振幅が大きくなる。
Note that the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210A is increased by increasing the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 to increase the vibration amplitude X mod, 0 by utilizing the increase in centrifugal force. It can be enlarged. Alternatively, if the weight 2116 is attached around the rotation shaft 2114 of the vibration motor 2112 via an elastic member, the weight 2116 increases the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 and the asymmetry of the center of gravity of the weight 2116 with respect to the rotation shaft 2114. Is configured to increase. For this reason, when the rotational speed of the vibration motor 2112 is increased, the vibration amplitude further increases.
図6Bは、第1の光ファイバー124を回転させることにより、第1の光ファイバー124によって導光されるレーザ光の光学特性を変化させる導光特性モジュレータ210Bの構成を概略的に示している。
FIG. 6B schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 210B that changes the optical characteristics of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 by rotating the first optical fiber 124.
導光特性モジュレータ210Bは、レーザ光を導光する第1の光ファイバー124に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置2150と、導光部材変動装置2150を駆動するドライバ2170を備えている。ここで、導光部材変動装置2150は、第1の光ファイバー124に往復回転を加える光ファイバー回転装置である。導光部材変動装置2150は、回転モーター2152を有している。回転モーター2152は、図示しない固定部材の上に設置されている。回転モーター2152の回転軸2154には、ギア2156が取り付けられている。ギア2156は、第1の光ファイバー124に固定されたギア2158と噛み合っている。
The light guide characteristic modulator 210B includes a light guide member fluctuation device 2150 that applies mechanical fluctuations to the first optical fiber 124 that guides laser light, and a driver 2170 that drives the light guide member fluctuation device 2150. Here, the light guide member fluctuation device 2150 is an optical fiber rotation device that applies reciprocal rotation to the first optical fiber 124. The light guide member varying device 2150 has a rotation motor 2152. The rotary motor 2152 is installed on a fixing member (not shown). A gear 2156 is attached to the rotary shaft 2154 of the rotary motor 2152. The gear 2156 meshes with a gear 2158 fixed to the first optical fiber 124.
回転モーター2152は、電気配線2180を介してドライバ2170から電流の供給を受けると、回転軸2154が所定の角度範囲で周期的に右回りおよび左回りに往復回転する。この往復回転運動は、ギア2156を介して、第1の光ファイバー124に固定されたギア2158に伝達される。その結果、第1の光ファイバー124が往復回転される。これにより、第1の光ファイバー124の軸周りの捩れが周期的に変化するため、第1の光ファイバー124によって導光されるレーザ光の位相やモードが時間的に変化する。
When the rotation motor 2152 is supplied with a current from the driver 2170 via the electric wiring 2180, the rotation shaft 2154 reciprocally rotates clockwise and counterclockwise periodically within a predetermined angle range. This reciprocating rotational motion is transmitted to the gear 2158 fixed to the first optical fiber 124 via the gear 2156. As a result, the first optical fiber 124 is reciprocally rotated. As a result, the twist around the axis of the first optical fiber 124 changes periodically, so that the phase and mode of the laser light guided by the first optical fiber 124 change with time.
導光特性モジュレータ210Bにおいて、好ましくは、導光特性モジュレータ210Bの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、第1の光ファイバー124を捻る角度にして10°以上である。
In the light guide characteristic modulator 210B, the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210B is preferably 10 ° or more in terms of an angle at which the first optical fiber 124 is twisted.
導光特性モジュレータ210Bの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、回転モーター2152の往復回転の角度を大きくすることで、捻れ振幅θmod,0を大きくすることなどで、大きくすることが可能である。
The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 210B can be increased by increasing the reciprocal rotation angle of the rotary motor 2152, for example, by increasing the torsion amplitude θ mod, 0 .
図6Cは、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間において光路の屈折率を変化させることにより、レーザ光の光学特性を変化させる導光特性モジュレータ220Aの構成を概略的に示している。
FIG. 6C schematically shows a configuration of a light guide characteristic modulator 220A that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the refractive index of the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128. .
導光特性モジュレータ220Aは、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間の光路上に配置された屈折率モジュレータ2210と、屈折率モジュレータ2210を駆動するドライバ2220を備えている。屈折率モジュレータ2210は、これを通過するレーザ光の光路の屈折率を時間的に変化させる光学素子である。屈折率モジュレータ2210は、例えば、電気光学素子で構成されてよい。または、屈折率モジュレータ2210は、例えば、音響光学素子で構成されてよい。屈折率モジュレータ2210は、レーザ光を透過する光学媒体2212と、光学媒体2212に設けられた駆動電極2214を備えている。
The light guide characteristic modulator 220A includes a refractive index modulator 2210 disposed on the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128, and a driver 2220 for driving the refractive index modulator 2210. The refractive index modulator 2210 is an optical element that temporally changes the refractive index of the optical path of the laser light passing therethrough. The refractive index modulator 2210 may be composed of, for example, an electro-optic element. Alternatively, the refractive index modulator 2210 may be composed of an acousto-optic element, for example. The refractive index modulator 2210 includes an optical medium 2212 that transmits laser light, and a drive electrode 2214 provided on the optical medium 2212.
屈折率モジュレータ2210は、電気配線2230を介してドライバ2220から駆動電極2214に交流電圧が印加されると、光学媒体2212の屈折率が周期的に時間的に変化する。これにより、光学媒体2212を通過するレーザ光の位相が時間的に変化する。
In the refractive index modulator 2210, when an AC voltage is applied from the driver 2220 to the drive electrode 2214 via the electrical wiring 2230, the refractive index of the optical medium 2212 periodically changes over time. As a result, the phase of the laser light passing through the optical medium 2212 changes with time.
導光特性モジュレータ220Aにおいて、好ましくは、屈折率モジュレータ2210の導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、導光特性モジュレータ220Aの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、屈折率モジュレータ2210の屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmである。
In the light guide characteristic modulator 220A, preferably, the length of the refractive index modulator 2210 in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the light guide characteristic modulator 220A. The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 is Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator 2210.
導光特性モジュレータ220Aの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、屈折率モジュレータ2210に対する印加電圧の大きさにより制御できる。
The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 220A can be controlled by the magnitude of the voltage applied to the refractive index modulator 2210.
図6Dは、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間において光路の光路長を変化させることにより、レーザ光の光学特性を変化させる導光特性モジュレータ220Bの構成を概略的に示している。
FIG. 6D schematically shows a configuration of the light guide characteristic modulator 220B that changes the optical characteristic of the laser light by changing the optical path length of the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128. .
導光特性モジュレータ220Bは、コリメートレンズ126と第2のファイバー結合レンズ128の間の光路上に配置された屈折率モジュレータ2240と、屈折率モジュレータ2240を駆動するドライバ2260を備えている。屈折率モジュレータ2240は、光路上に配置された位相差円盤2250を有している。位相差円盤2250は、レーザ光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸パターン2252を有している。位相差円盤2250は、光路から外れた軸の周りに回転可能に支持されている。位相差円盤2250の外周にはギア2254が形成されている。屈折率モジュレータ2240はまた、位相差円盤2250を回転させる回転モーター2242を有している。回転モーター2242は、図示しない固定部材の上に設置されている。回転モーター2242の回転軸2244には、ギア2246が取り付けられている。ギア2246は、位相差円盤2250のギア2254と噛み合っている。
The light guide characteristic modulator 220B includes a refractive index modulator 2240 disposed on the optical path between the collimating lens 126 and the second fiber coupling lens 128, and a driver 2260 for driving the refractive index modulator 2240. Refractive index modulator 2240 has a phase difference disk 2250 disposed on the optical path. The phase difference disk 2250 has a concavo-convex pattern 2252 having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the laser beam. The phase difference disk 2250 is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis out of the optical path. A gear 2254 is formed on the outer periphery of the phase difference disk 2250. The refractive index modulator 2240 also has a rotation motor 2242 that rotates the phase difference disk 2250. The rotary motor 2242 is installed on a fixing member (not shown). A gear 2246 is attached to the rotation shaft 2244 of the rotation motor 2242. The gear 2246 meshes with the gear 2254 of the phase difference disk 2250.
回転モーター2242は、電気配線2270を介してドライバ2260から電流の供給を受けると、回転軸2244が回転する。この回転運動は、ギア2246を介して、位相差円盤2250に形成されたギア2254に伝達される。その結果、位相差円盤2250が回転され、凹凸パターン2252が光路を横切って移動する。これにより、位相差円盤2250を通過するレーザ光の光路長が周期的に変化するため、レーザ光の位相が時間的に変化する。
When the rotation motor 2242 receives supply of current from the driver 2260 via the electric wiring 2270, the rotation shaft 2244 rotates. This rotational motion is transmitted to the gear 2254 formed on the phase difference disk 2250 via the gear 2246. As a result, the phase difference disk 2250 is rotated, and the concave / convex pattern 2252 moves across the optical path. As a result, the optical path length of the laser light passing through the phase difference disk 2250 periodically changes, so that the phase of the laser light changes with time.
導光特性モジュレータ220Bの駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、回転モーター2242に対する印加電圧を大きくして回転速度を上げることで、大きくすることが可能である。
The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the light guide characteristic modulator 220B can be increased by increasing the rotation speed by increasing the voltage applied to the rotary motor 2242.
図5に示した撮像システム100において、スペックルモジュレータ200として、図6A~図6Dに示した導光特性モジュレータ210A,210B,220A,220Bのいずれかひとつを搭載した場合、図1A~図1C、図2A~図2C、図3A1~図3C2を参照しながら説明した通り、スペックルモジュレータ200の作用・効果は以下のようになる。
・スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくしていくと、ΔImodがΔImod,thになるまではスペックル低減効果が高まっていき、ΔImodがΔImod,thとなる近傍で飽和する。
・スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodをΔImod,thで規格化した値を実効的変調振幅因子Meffとすると、(スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくすることにより)実効的変調振幅因子Meffを大きくすると、スペックル低減効果もMeffとともに高まり、Meff>1ではスペックル低減効果はほぼ飽和すると考えられる。 In theimaging system 100 shown in FIG. 5, when any one of the light guide characteristic modulators 210A, 210B, 220A, and 220B shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D is mounted as the speckle modulator 200, FIGS. As described with reference to FIGS. 2A to 2C and FIGS. 3A1 to 3C2, operations and effects of the speckle modulator 200 are as follows.
Whenspeckle modulator 200 is increased the variation range [Delta] I mod drive strength of, [Delta] it mod is [Delta] I mod, Until th continue growing speckle reduction effect, the vicinity of [Delta] I mod is [Delta] I mod, the th Saturates at.
When the value obtained by normalizing the drive intensity change width ΔI mod of thespeckle modulator 200 by Δ Imod, th is defined as an effective modulation amplitude factor M eff (the drive intensity change width ΔI mod of the speckle modulator 200 is increased. If it by) increasing the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff, speckle reduction effect increases with M eff, speckle reduction effect in M eff> 1 is considered substantially saturated.
・スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくしていくと、ΔImodがΔImod,thになるまではスペックル低減効果が高まっていき、ΔImodがΔImod,thとなる近傍で飽和する。
・スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodをΔImod,thで規格化した値を実効的変調振幅因子Meffとすると、(スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodを大きくすることにより)実効的変調振幅因子Meffを大きくすると、スペックル低減効果もMeffとともに高まり、Meff>1ではスペックル低減効果はほぼ飽和すると考えられる。 In the
When
When the value obtained by normalizing the drive intensity change width ΔI mod of the
また、
・M0やMeffを大きくするようにスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動振幅や駆動幅を大きくすると、スペックル低減効果が高まる。
・このため、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが大きくなるようにスペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させるとスペックル低減効果が最大となる。
・Meff≧1とすることで、撮像、照明、変調のタイミングを最適化すれば、スペックル低減効果を最大に高められる。また、Meff≧1となる条件では、スペックル低減効果が飽和し、撮像、照明、変調のタイミング依存性が小さく、安定なスペックル低減効果が得られる。 Also,
· M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of thespeckle modulator 200 so as to increase the M eff, increases the speckle reduction effect.
For this reason, when thespeckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 are synchronized so that the change width ΔI mod of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator 200 is increased, the speckle reduction effect is maximized.
By setting M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation. Further, under the condition of M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
・M0やMeffを大きくするようにスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動振幅や駆動幅を大きくすると、スペックル低減効果が高まる。
・このため、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが大きくなるようにスペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させるとスペックル低減効果が最大となる。
・Meff≧1とすることで、撮像、照明、変調のタイミングを最適化すれば、スペックル低減効果を最大に高められる。また、Meff≧1となる条件では、スペックル低減効果が飽和し、撮像、照明、変調のタイミング依存性が小さく、安定なスペックル低減効果が得られる。 Also,
· M 0 and an increase in the drive amplitude or drive the width of the
For this reason, when the
By setting M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect can be maximized by optimizing the timing of imaging, illumination, and modulation. Further, under the condition of M eff ≧ 1, the speckle reduction effect is saturated, the timing dependency of imaging, illumination, and modulation is small, and a stable speckle reduction effect is obtained.
また、図4A1~図4C2を参照しながら説明した通り、スペックルモジュレータの駆動周期tmod、パルス発光期間tpw,ill、変調振幅因子M0に関して、スペックル低減効果は、次のようになる。
・tmod>2M0tpw,illの場合でも、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させるとスペックル低減効果を最も効率的に引き出せる。但し、Meff<1の場合には、スペックル低減効果が飽和するほど低減することはできない。
・スペックルモジュレータ200をM0≧1で駆動することにより、tmod<2tpw,illになるような高速でスペックルモジュレータ200を駆動しなくても、これよりM0倍遅い条件(tmod≦2M0tpw,ill)でも、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させることで、スペックル低減効果が飽和する最大レベルの効果を引き出せる。
・スペックルモジュレータ200をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦M0tpw,illの場合は、同期制御のタイミングにあまり依存性せず、スペックル低減効果は安定に最大に近い値にすることができる。 In addition, as described with reference to FIGS. 4A1 to 4C2, the speckle reduction effect is as follows with respect to the driving period t mod , the pulse emission period t pw, ill , and the modulation amplitude factor M 0 of the speckle modulator. .
Even in the case of t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill , the speckle reduction effect can be most efficiently brought out by synchronizing thespeckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110. However, when M eff <1, it cannot be reduced as the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
By driving thespeckle modulator 200 with M 0 ≧ 1, even if the speckle modulator 200 is not driven at a high speed such that t mod <2t pw, ill , a condition that is M 0 times slower than this (t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, ill ), by synchronizing the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110, it is possible to bring out the maximum level effect that the speckle reduction effect is saturated.
・Speckle modulator 200 is driven with M 0 ≧ 1 and t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, ill , it does not depend much on the timing of synchronous control, and the speckle reduction effect is almost stable and maximum Can be a value.
・tmod>2M0tpw,illの場合でも、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させるとスペックル低減効果を最も効率的に引き出せる。但し、Meff<1の場合には、スペックル低減効果が飽和するほど低減することはできない。
・スペックルモジュレータ200をM0≧1で駆動することにより、tmod<2tpw,illになるような高速でスペックルモジュレータ200を駆動しなくても、これよりM0倍遅い条件(tmod≦2M0tpw,ill)でも、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110を同期させることで、スペックル低減効果が飽和する最大レベルの効果を引き出せる。
・スペックルモジュレータ200をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦M0tpw,illの場合は、同期制御のタイミングにあまり依存性せず、スペックル低減効果は安定に最大に近い値にすることができる。 In addition, as described with reference to FIGS. 4A1 to 4C2, the speckle reduction effect is as follows with respect to the driving period t mod , the pulse emission period t pw, ill , and the modulation amplitude factor M 0 of the speckle modulator. .
Even in the case of t mod > 2M 0 t pw, ill , the speckle reduction effect can be most efficiently brought out by synchronizing the
By driving the
・
前述したように、本実施形態の撮像システム100は、照明光生成器110のパルス発光期間tpw,illに基づいてPWMによる光量調整を行うことも、イメージャ150のtpw,expに基づいてPWMによる光量調整を行うことも可能である。
As described above, the imaging system 100 according to the present embodiment performs the light amount adjustment by the PWM based on the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110, or the PWM based on the tpw, exp of the imager 150. It is also possible to adjust the amount of light.
照明光生成器110のパルス発光期間tpw,illに基づいてPWMによる光量調整を行う場合、本実施形態の撮像システム100は以下のように動作する。
When performing light quantity adjustment by PWM based on the pulse light emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110, the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment operates as follows.
同期コントローラ240は、少なくとも照明パルス1個あたりのパルス発光期間tpw,illにおいて、スペックルモジュレータ200が動作するように制御する。
The synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least in the pulse emission period tpw, ill per illumination pulse.
スペックルモジュレータ200は、周期的にスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodを変化させる。スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、好ましくは、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上に設定される。例えば、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、パルス発光期間tpw,illにおけるスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上の値となるように設定される。
The speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th . For example, the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th of the drive intensity change width ΔI mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the pulse emission period tpw, ill . Is set to be
また、同期コントローラ240は、スペックル低減効果を高めるため、以下のように、少なくとも、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する。
Also, the synchronous controller 240 controls at least the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110 and the driving timing of the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
同期コントローラ240は、イメージャ150の露光期間tpw,expにおいて、照明光生成器110が照明パルスを生成するように制御する。
The synchronous controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110 to generate illumination pulses during the exposure period tpw, exp of the imager 150.
パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間tpw,illの中心が、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻となるように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件A)
When the pulse light emission period t pw, ill is a period that is less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse light emission period t pw, ill is equal to the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include a time when the rate of change is substantially maximum. For example, the synchronous controller 240 is connected to the illumination light generator 110 and the spec so that the center of the pulse emission period t pw, ill is the time when the change rate of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is substantially maximized. The modulator 200 is controlled. (Condition A)
または、パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間がtpw,ill、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。特には、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間tpw,illの中心が、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件B)
Alternatively, when the pulse emission period t pw, ill is a period less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse emission period is t pw, ill and the driving intensity I of the speckle modulator 200 The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of mod is included. For example, the synchronous controller 240 includes the illumination light generator so that the pulse emission period t pw, ill includes a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. 110 and speckle modulator 200 are controlled. In particular, the synchronous controller 240 performs illumination so that the center of the pulse emission period t pw, ill is a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. The light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled. (Condition B)
また、パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2以上の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、パルス発光期間tpw,illが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件C)
Further, when the pulse emission period t pw, ill is a period of ½ or more of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the pulse emission period t pw, ill is the driving intensity I of the speckle modulator 200. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time when mod takes the maximum value and the time when mod takes the minimum value. (Condition C)
スペックルモジュレータ200と同期した異なる時間遅れを持つ照明パルスがさらにもう一つまたはそれ以上あってもよい。そのパルス発光期間がtmodの1/2未満である場合は、(条件A)または(条件B)を満たせばなおよい。たとえば、最初の照明パルスのちょうど半周期後に第2の照明パルスが来る場合、最初の照明パルスがスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの傾き(の絶対値)が最大となる時刻を含めば、第2の照明パルスもスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの傾き(の絶対値)が最大となる時刻を含む(図3B1参照)。パルス発光期間がtmodの1/2以上である場合は(条件C)を満たせばなおよい。
There may be one or more more illumination pulses with different time delays synchronized with the speckle modulator 200. When the pulse emission period is less than ½ of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition A) or (Condition B). For example, if the second illumination pulse comes exactly half a cycle after the first illumination pulse, if the first illumination pulse includes the time at which the slope (absolute value) of the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is maximum, The second illumination pulse also includes a time at which the slope (absolute value) of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 becomes maximum (see FIG. 3B1). In the case where the pulse emission period is ½ or more of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition C).
また、同期コントローラ240は、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングとイメージャ150の撮像タイミングを同期させて制御する。同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をM0≧1で駆動する。さらに、同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をtmod≦2M0tpw,illで駆動する。または、同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をtpw,ill<tmod≦M0tpw,illで駆動する。
Further, the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization. The synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with M 0 ≧ 1. Furthermore, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, ill . Alternatively, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t pw, ill <t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, ill .
以上は、照明光生成器110のパルス発光期間tpw,illに基づいてPWMによる光量調整を行う場合の動作説明であるが、これに代えて、イメージャ150のtpw,expに基づいてPWMによる光量調整を行う場合、本実施形態の撮像システム100は以下のように動作する。この場合、照明光生成器110は、必ずしも、コヒーレント光の所定のパルス発光期間tpw,illの照明パルスを生成する照明パルス生成器で構成されている必要はない。
The above is a description of the operation in the case where the light amount adjustment by PWM is performed based on the pulse light emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110. Instead of this, the PWM is performed based on the t pw, exp of the imager 150. When performing light quantity adjustment, the imaging system 100 of this embodiment operates as follows. In this case, the illumination light generator 110 does not necessarily need to be composed of an illumination pulse generator that generates illumination pulses having a predetermined pulse emission period tpw, ill of coherent light.
同期コントローラ240は、少なくとも露光期間tpw,expにおいて、スペックルモジュレータ200が動作するように制御する。
The synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least in the exposure period tpw, exp .
スペックルモジュレータ200は、周期的にスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodを変化させる。スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上に設定される。例えば、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、露光期間tpw,expにおけるスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上の値となるように設定される。
The speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator. The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th . For example, the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 has a value that is greater than or equal to the driving intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th of the driving intensity change width ΔI mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the exposure period tpw, exp . Is set as follows.
同期コントローラ240は、スペックル低減効果を高めるため、以下のように、少なくとも、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を同期させて制御する。
The synchronization controller 240 controls at least the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
露光期間tpw,expが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻を含むように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expの中心が、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻となるように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。
When the exposure period t pw, exp is a period that is less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period t pw, exp is the rate of change of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which becomes substantially maximum. For example, the synchronous controller 240 sets the imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 so that the center of the exposure period t pw, exp is the time when the change rate of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is substantially maximized. Control.
または、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。特には、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expの中心が、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。
Alternatively, when the exposure period t pw, exp is a period that is less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period t pw, exp is equal to the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value is included. For example, the synchronous controller 240 may use the imager 150 and the speckle so that the exposure period t pw, exp includes a time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. The modulator 200 is controlled. In particular, the synchronization controller 240 sets the imager 150 so that the center of the exposure period t pw, exp is the time at which the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. And the speckle modulator 200 is controlled.
また、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2以上の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、露光期間tpw,expが、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodが最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、イメージャ150とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。
When the exposure periods tpw, exp are ½ or more of the speckle modulation period tmod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the exposure period tpw, exp is a drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The imager 150 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time for taking the maximum value and the time for taking the minimum value.
本実施形態の撮像システム100においては、上述した構成の動作により、安定的かつ効果的にスペックルノイズを低減することが可能である。しかも、既存の照明装置や撮像システムに対して、大きなコストをかけることなく、安定かつ効果的にスペックルノイズを低減するための構成を追加することが可能である。また、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0や照明光生成器110のパルス発光期間tpw,illに制約があっても、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングと照明のタイミングと撮像のタイミングを適正化してMeffを大きくすることにより、スペックル低減効果を十分に引き出すことが可能である。とりわけ、高速な撮像フレームレートで撮影する場合や、瞬間的に短い時間で撮影する場合、パルス幅変調(PWM)方式で調光する場合などで必要となる撮像フレームあたりの短い露光期間または短いパルス発光期間に対しても、安定的かつ効果的にスペックルノイズを低減することが可能である。
In the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment, speckle noise can be stably and effectively reduced by the operation of the above-described configuration. In addition, a configuration for reducing speckle noise stably and effectively can be added to an existing lighting device or imaging system without incurring a large cost. Even if the drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 and the pulse emission period tpw, ill of the illumination light generator 110 are limited, the drive timing, illumination timing, and imaging timing of the speckle modulator 200 are limited. By optimizing and increasing M eff , it is possible to sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect. In particular, when shooting at a high imaging frame rate, when shooting instantaneously in a short time, or when dimming with a pulse width modulation (PWM) method, a short exposure period or a short pulse per imaging frame is required. Speckle noise can be stably and effectively reduced even during the light emission period.
従来の撮像システムにおいて、光ファイバーを機械的に変化させることによりスペックル低減を図る手法は、撮像のフレームレートが速い場合や撮像時間が短い場合等では、スペックル模様の重なり効果が十分に発揮できないことが予測される。典型的な例として、撮像システムの撮像フレームレートfrを60fps、撮像フレームレートの逆数に相当する時間の半分程度がイメージャの撮像フレームあたりの露光可能期間tonとすると、イメージャの撮像フレームあたりの露光期間tpw,expは、tpw,exp≦ton=1/2×1/60sec=8.3msec程度になり、これより速い周期で光ファイバーの形状や応力を機械的に変化させることが必要と考えられる。また、これよりも短い時間で露光する必要がある場合(高速撮影する必要がある場合)は、機械的な振動速度の制約のため、スペックル模様の重なりによる平均化の効果が得られにくいことが予想される。
In conventional imaging systems, the speckle reduction method by mechanically changing the optical fiber cannot fully exhibit the speckle pattern overlapping effect when the imaging frame rate is fast or when the imaging time is short. It is predicted. As a typical example, 60 fps imaging frame rate f r of the imaging system, the about half of the time corresponding to the inverse of the imaging frame rate and exposure period t on per imaging frame of the imager, the imager per imaging frame The exposure period t pw, exp is about t pw, exp ≦ t on = 1/2 × 1/60 sec = 8.3 msec, and it is necessary to mechanically change the shape and stress of the optical fiber at a faster cycle. it is conceivable that. Also, when exposure is required in a shorter time (when high-speed shooting is required), it is difficult to obtain an averaging effect due to speckle pattern overlap due to mechanical vibration speed limitations. Is expected.
更には、レーザ光を使った照明装置で多用されるパルス幅変調(PWM)で光量調整を行う場合は、光源のパルス発光期間(または照射パルス幅)tpw,illの最小値は、イメージャの撮像フレームあたりの露光期間tpw,expを調光の分割数で除した期間となる。例えば、30dBの調光レンジを仮定すると、最小のパルス発光期間(または照射パルス幅)tpw,ill(=tpw,exp)は、8.3msec/1000=8.3μsec程度になるが、これに対応する機械的な振動周期を実現するのは困難と思われる。
Furthermore, when the light amount is adjusted by pulse width modulation (PWM) frequently used in an illumination device using laser light , the minimum value of the pulse light emission period (or irradiation pulse width) tpw, ill of the light source is This is a period obtained by dividing the exposure period tpw, exp per imaging frame by the number of dimming divisions. For example, assuming a dimming range of 30 dB, the minimum pulse emission period (or irradiation pulse width) t pw, ill (= t pw, exp ) is about 8.3 msec / 1000 = 8.3 μsec. It seems difficult to realize a mechanical vibration period corresponding to.
また、目視であれば、目の時間的な応答時間をイメージャの撮像フレームあたりの露光期間tpw,expとみなすことができ、おおよそ1/30秒よりも短い時間の間(30fps(フレーム/秒))にスペックルの重ね合わせが終了する必要がある。更には、照明の調光方式としてPWMによる調光を考慮すると、上記と同様の理由から、機械的な振動周期の駆動周期に対して更に厳しい要求が発生する。
Further, when viewed visually, the temporal response time of the eyes can be regarded as the exposure period tpw, exp per imaging frame of the imager , and for a time shorter than approximately 1/30 second (30 fps (frame / second). )) Needs to finish the speckle overlay. Further, considering the dimming by PWM as the dimming method of illumination, for the same reason as described above, a more severe requirement for the driving cycle of the mechanical vibration cycle occurs.
これに対して、本実施形態の撮像システム100は、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングと照明のタイミングと撮像のタイミングを適正化してMeffを大きくすることにより、スペックル低減効果を十分に引き出すことが可能であるため、このような要求にも対応することが可能である。すなわち、高速な撮像フレームレートで撮影する場合や、瞬間的に短い時間で撮影する場合、パルス幅変調(PWM)方式で調光する場合などで必要となる撮像フレームあたりの短い露光期間または短いパルス発光期間に対しても、安定的かつ効果的にスペックルノイズを低減することが可能である。
On the other hand, the imaging system 100 of the present embodiment can sufficiently bring out the speckle reduction effect by optimizing the driving timing of the speckle modulator 200, the timing of illumination, and the timing of imaging to increase M eff. Therefore, it is possible to respond to such a request. In other words, when shooting at a high imaging frame rate, when shooting instantaneously for a short time, or when dimming with a pulse width modulation (PWM) method, a short exposure period or a short pulse per imaging frame is required. Speckle noise can be stably and effectively reduced even during the light emission period.
[第2実施形態]
図7は、第2実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。図7において、図5に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。以下、相違部分に重点をおいて説明する。つまり、以下の説明で触れない部分は、第1実施形態と同様である。 [Second Embodiment]
FIG. 7 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including an imaging system according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 7, members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted. In the following, explanation will be given with emphasis on the different parts. That is, the part which is not touched by the following description is the same as that of 1st Embodiment.
図7は、第2実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。図7において、図5に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。以下、相違部分に重点をおいて説明する。つまり、以下の説明で触れない部分は、第1実施形態と同様である。 [Second Embodiment]
FIG. 7 schematically shows an overall configuration of an endoscope system including an imaging system according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 7, members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted. In the following, explanation will be given with emphasis on the different parts. That is, the part which is not touched by the following description is the same as that of 1st Embodiment.
本実施形態に係る撮像システム100Aは、第1実施形態に係る撮像システム100と比較して、照明装置102Aが相違している。照明装置102Aにおいては、照明光生成器110は、複数の照明パルスを含むひとつの照明パルス群を繰り返し照明パルス群列として生成する。例えば、ひとつの照明パルス群に含まれる複数の照明パルスの数は3以上である。
The imaging system 100A according to the present embodiment is different from the imaging system 100 according to the first embodiment in the illumination device 102A. In the illumination device 102A, the illumination light generator 110 repeatedly generates one illumination pulse group including a plurality of illumination pulses as an illumination pulse group sequence. For example, the number of the plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group is 3 or more.
ひとつの照明パルス群における最初の照明パルスの点灯時刻から最後の照明パルスの消灯時刻までの期間を実効的なパルス発光期間とする。このとき、実効的なパルス発光期間は、例えば、ひとつの照明パルス群に含まれる複数の照明パルスの正味のパルス発光期間に対して2倍以上の期間である。
The period from the lighting time of the first lighting pulse to the lighting time of the last lighting pulse in one lighting pulse group is defined as an effective pulse emission period. At this time, the effective pulse emission period is, for example, a period twice or more as long as the net pulse emission period of a plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group.
このように照明光生成器110を制御するため、照明装置102Aは、パルス幅変調(PWM)方式光コントローラ250を有している。パルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effにおける複数の照明パルスのパルス幅を制御することによって実効的な照明光量を調整する。パルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250は、所望の調光量に対応するパルス発光期間tpwを複数のパルス発光期間tpw,ill,1,・・・,tpw,ill,n(nは2以上の自然数)に分割する複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式光コントローラである。ここで、nは、ひとつの照明パルス群に含まれる複数の照明パルスの数を表している。また、パルス発光期間tpw,ill,i(i=1,…,n)は、ひとつの照明パルス群に含まれるi番目の照明パルスの発光期間を表している。
In order to control the illumination light generator 110 in this way, the illumination device 102 </ b> A includes a pulse width modulation (PWM) light controller 250. The pulse width modulation type light controller 250 adjusts the effective amount of illumination light by controlling the pulse width of a plurality of illumination pulses in the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff . The pulse width modulation type light controller 250 divides the pulse emission period tpw corresponding to the desired light control amount into a plurality of pulse emission periods tpw, ill, 1 , ... , tpw, ill, n (n is 2 or more). A multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation type optical controller. Here, n represents the number of a plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group. Further, the pulse emission period tpw, ill, i (i = 1,..., N) represents the emission period of the i-th illumination pulse included in one illumination pulse group.
言い換えれば、照明装置102Aは、第1実施形態に係る照明装置102に対して、複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250が追加された構成となっている。パルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250は、同期コントローラ240から入力される信号に基づいて照明光生成器110のドライバ114を制御する。
In other words, the illuminating device 102A has a configuration in which a multi-pulse division type pulse width modulation light controller 250 is added to the illuminating device 102 according to the first embodiment. The pulse width modulation type light controller 250 controls the driver 114 of the illumination light generator 110 based on a signal input from the synchronization controller 240.
よく知られた「単一パルス型のパルス幅変調方式」(図8A)と比較して、「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式」(図8B)を説明する。図8Aと図8Bは、それぞれのパルス幅変調方式における照明パルス生成器の照射波形とスペックルモジュレータの駆動波形とスペックル低減効果の指標となる実効的変調振幅因子Meffを示している。
Compared with the well-known “single pulse type pulse width modulation method” (FIG. 8A), the “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation method” (FIG. 8B) will be described. FIGS. 8A and 8B show the irradiation waveform of the illumination pulse generator, the driving waveform of the speckle modulator, and the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff that serves as an indicator of the speckle reduction effect in each pulse width modulation method.
「単一パルス型のパルス幅変調方式」は、図8Aの上段に示すように、露光可能期間ton内の時間で、照明パルスの時間幅(または期間と記す)を所望の光量に対応するパルス発光期間tpw,illになるようにして、照明光量を調整する方式である。
"Single Pulse pulse-width modulation method", as shown in the upper part of FIG. 8A, the time of the exposure period t on, corresponding duration of the illumination pulse (or referred to as period) to the desired amount In this method, the amount of illumination light is adjusted so that the pulse emission period tpw, ill is reached .
一方、本出願で提案する「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式」は、図8Bの上段に示すように、tpw,ill=Σtpw,ill,iとなるように複数のパルスに分割して、照明光量を調整する方式である。
On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 8B, the “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation method” proposed in the present application is divided into a plurality of pulses such that t pw, ill = Σt pw, ill, i. In this way, the amount of illumination light is adjusted.
図8Aの中段および図8Bの中段に示すように、スペックルモジュレータの駆動波形が同じであっても、図8Aの下段に示すように、「単一パルス型のパルス幅変調方式」では、ΔImodはパルス発光期間tpw,illが小さくなるとこれにほぼ比例して小さくなるため、Meffも小さくなっていくが、図8Bの下段に示すように、「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式」では、照射パルスの発光時期を分散させるとこにより、照射光量を小さくするためにパルス発光期間tpw,illを小さくしても、実効的なパルス発光期間を拡大することになるため、結果として、実効的なΔImod(これをΔImod,effとする)を拡大することができる。このため、スペックルの低減指標となる実効的変調振幅因子Meffを実効的に大きくすることが可能である。
As shown in the middle part of FIG. 8A and the middle part of FIG. 8B, even if the drive waveform of the speckle modulator is the same, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 8A, in the “single pulse type pulse width modulation method”, ΔI Mod decreases in proportion to the pulse emission period t pw, ill, and thus M eff also decreases. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 8B, “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation method” In this case, by dispersing the emission timing of the irradiation pulse, the effective pulse emission period is expanded even if the pulse emission period tpw, ill is reduced in order to reduce the irradiation light amount. , Effective ΔI mod (this is ΔI mod, eff ) can be enlarged. For this reason, it is possible to effectively increase the effective modulation amplitude factor M eff that serves as a speckle reduction index.
尚、露光可能期間ton内の複数の照明パルスの差し渡しの時間幅を実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effとすると、「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ」は、パルス発光期間を実効的に拡大する「実効的パルス発光期間拡大器」として機能する。ここで、「実効的パルス発光期間拡大器」の概念は、前述のように光量調整のためでなくても、照明パルスを時間的に分割させることにより実効的なパルス発光期間を拡大できるため、「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ」の概念よりも大きい概念である。
When the time width for passing a plurality of illumination pulses within the exposure possible period t on is an effective pulse emission period tpw, eff , the “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller” It functions as an “effective pulse emission period expander” that effectively expands. Here, the concept of “effective pulse light emission period expander” is that the effective pulse light emission period can be expanded by dividing the illumination pulse in time, without adjusting the light amount as described above. This is a concept larger than the concept of “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller”.
尚、「実効的パルス発光期間拡大器」や「複数パルス分割型のパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ」を活用する場合は、同期コントローラ240に対しては、ΔImod,effやtpw,effを大きくするように、照明パルスの時間間隔や、照明パルスのタイミングを設定することが望ましい。
When using an “effective pulse emission period expander” or “multiple pulse division type pulse width modulation optical controller”, ΔI mod, eff and t pw, eff are increased for the synchronous controller 240. Thus, it is desirable to set the time interval of illumination pulses and the timing of illumination pulses.
本実施形態の撮像システム100A以下のように動作する。
It operates as below the imaging system 100A of this embodiment.
同期コントローラ240は、少なくとも実効的なパルス発光期間において、スペックルモジュレータ200が動作するように制御する。
The synchronous controller 240 controls the speckle modulator 200 to operate at least during an effective pulse emission period.
また、同期コントローラ240は、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングとイメージャ150の撮像タイミングを同期させて制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、イメージャ150の露光期間(tpw,exp)において、照明光生成器110が照明パルスを生成するように制御する。
Further, the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization. For example, the synchronous controller 240 controls the illumination light generator 110 to generate illumination pulses during the exposure period (t pw, exp ) of the imager 150.
スペックルモジュレータ200は、周期的にスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodを変化させる。スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、好ましくは、駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上に設定される。例えば、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度振幅Imod,0は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effにおけるスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅ΔImodが駆動強度しきい幅ΔImod,th以上の値となるように設定される。
The speckle modulator 200 periodically changes the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator. The drive intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is preferably set to be equal to or greater than the drive intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th . For example, the driving intensity amplitude I mod, 0 of the speckle modulator 200 is equal to or larger than the driving intensity threshold width ΔI mod, th of the driving intensity change width ΔI mod of the speckle modulator 200 in the effective pulse emission period tpw, eff . Is set to be the value of.
また、同期コントローラ240は、スペックル低減効果を高めるため、以下のように、少なくとも、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を同期させて制御する。
Also, the synchronous controller 240 controls at least the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 in synchronization as follows in order to enhance the speckle reduction effect.
実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effがスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの変化率が最大となる時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、複数の照明パルスのうち、いずれかひとつの照明パルスがスペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの変化率が最大となる時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。または、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effの中心が、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの変化率が最大となる時刻となるように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件D)
When the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a period less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle modulator drive. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which the rate of change of the intensity I mod is maximized. For example, the synchronous controller 240 may connect the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle so that any one of the plurality of illumination pulses includes a time at which the change rate of the speckle modulator driving intensity I mod is maximum. The modulator 200 is controlled. Alternatively, the synchronous controller 240 may connect the illumination light generator 110 and the speckle so that the center of the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the time at which the rate of change of the speckle modulator driving intensity I mod is maximized. The modulator 200 is controlled. (Condition D)
または、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件E)
Alternatively, when the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a period that is less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of the modulator driving intensity I mod is included. (Condition E)
または、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2未満の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。例えば、同期コントローラ240は、ひとつの照明パルス群に含まれる複数の照明パルスのうち、いずれかひとつの照明パルスがスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。または、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effの中心が、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件F)
Alternatively, when the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a period that is less than ½ of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is the speckle. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time at which the center value of the maximum value and the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the modulator is included. For example, the synchronous controller 240 may determine that one of the plurality of illumination pulses included in one illumination pulse group is the center of the substantial maximum value and minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include the time when the value is taken. Alternatively, the synchronization controller 240 is set so that the center of the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a time at which the center of the substantial maximum value and the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is taken. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled. (Condition F)
また、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックル変調周期tmodの1/2以上の期間である場合、同期コントローラ240は、実効的なパルス発光期間tpw,effが、スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度Imodの最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、照明光生成器110とスペックルモジュレータ200を制御する。(条件G)
In addition, when the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a period of ½ or more of the speckle modulation period t mod , the synchronous controller 240 determines that the effective pulse emission period t pw, eff is a speckle. The illumination light generator 110 and the speckle modulator 200 are controlled so as to include a time for taking the maximum value and a time for taking the minimum value of the driving intensity I mod of the modulator. (Condition G)
スペックルモジュレータ200と同期した異なる時間遅れを持つ照明パルス群がさらにもう一つまたはそれ以上あってもよい。その実効的なパルス発光期間がtmodの1/2未満である場合は、(条件D)、(条件E)、または(条件F)を満たせばなおよい。たとえば、最初の照明パルス群のちょうど半周期後に第2の照明パルス群が来る場合、最初の照明パルス群がスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの傾き(の絶対値)が最大となる時刻を含めば、第2の照明パルス群もスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度Imodの傾き(の絶対値)が最大となる時刻を含む。実効的なパルス発光期間がtmodの1/2以上である場合は(条件G)を満たせばなおよい。
There may be one or more more illumination pulses with different time delays synchronized with the speckle modulator 200. When the effective pulse emission period is less than 1/2 of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition D), (Condition E), or (Condition F). For example, when the second illumination pulse group comes exactly half a cycle after the first illumination pulse group, the time at which the slope (absolute value) of the drive intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 is maximized is the first illumination pulse group. If included, the second illumination pulse group also includes a time at which the slope (absolute value) of the driving intensity I mod of the speckle modulator 200 becomes maximum. When the effective pulse emission period is 1/2 or more of t mod , it is more preferable to satisfy (Condition G).
また、同期コントローラ240は、照明光生成器110のパルス生成タイミングとスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動タイミングとイメージャ150の撮像タイミングを同期させて制御する。同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をM0≧1で駆動する。さらに、同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をtmod≦2M0tpw,effで駆動する。または、同期コントローラ240は、スペックルモジュレータ200と照明光生成器110をtpw,eff<tmod≦M0tpw,effで駆動する。
Further, the synchronization controller 240 controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination light generator 110, the drive timing of the speckle modulator 200, and the imaging timing of the imager 150 in synchronization. The synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with M 0 ≧ 1. Furthermore, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, eff . Alternatively, the synchronous controller 240 drives the speckle modulator 200 and the illumination light generator 110 with t pw, eff <t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, eff .
[第3実施形態]
第1実施形態(図5)や第2実施形態(図7)において、スペックルモジュレータ200は、第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と第2の導光特性モジュレータ220と波長モジュレータ230の少なくともひとつで構成されてよいが、それらを組み合わせて構成されてもよい。 [Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment (FIG. 5) and the second embodiment (FIG. 7), thespeckle modulator 200 is at least one of the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and the wavelength modulator 230. Although it may be configured, it may be configured by combining them.
第1実施形態(図5)や第2実施形態(図7)において、スペックルモジュレータ200は、第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と第2の導光特性モジュレータ220と波長モジュレータ230の少なくともひとつで構成されてよいが、それらを組み合わせて構成されてもよい。 [Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment (FIG. 5) and the second embodiment (FIG. 7), the
ふたつのスペックルモジュレータを組み合わせて構成されたスペックルモジュレータ200の例を図9Aと図9Bと図9Cに示す。これらの組み合わせによるスペックル低減の作用効果は次のようになる。
An example of the speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators is shown in FIGS. 9A, 9B, and 9C. The effect of speckle reduction by these combinations is as follows.
図9Aは、駆動機構および光学的な原理において、同じふたつのスペックルモジュレータM1を組み合わせて構成されたスペックルモジュレータ200を模式的に示している。スペックルモジュレータM1は、第1の光ファイバー124に振動を加えるように構成されている。図9Aには、各スペックルモジュレータM1は、代表的に、図6Aに示された導光特性モジュレータ210Aとして描かれている。
FIG. 9A schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining the same two speckle modulators M1 in terms of the driving mechanism and the optical principle. The speckle modulator M1 is configured to apply vibration to the first optical fiber 124. In FIG. 9A, each speckle modulator M1 is typically depicted as the light guide characteristic modulator 210A shown in FIG. 6A.
同じふたつのスペックルモジュレータM1を組み合わせた場合、各々の導光特性モジュレータ210Aに対する実効的変調振幅因子をMeff,1,Meff,2とすると、全体としてのスペックル低減効果Meff,totalは、各々の導光特性モジュレータ210Aで引き起こすスペックル模様の変化が同じであるため、
Meff,1+Meff,2<1の場合は、Meff,total=Meff,1+Meff,2
Meff,1+Meff,2≧1の場合は、Meff,total=1
となる。ひとつのスペックルモジュレータM1でスペックル低減効果が足りない場合に有効な構成である。 When the same two speckle modulators M1 are combined, if the effective modulation amplitude factor for each light guidecharacteristic modulator 210A is M eff, 1 , M eff, 2 , the overall speckle reduction effect M eff, total is Because the change in speckle pattern caused by each light guide characteristic modulator 210A is the same,
If M eff, 1 + M eff, 2 <1, then M eff, total = M eff, 1 + M eff, 2
When M eff, 1 + M eff, 2 ≧ 1, M eff, total = 1
It becomes. This configuration is effective when the speckle reduction effect is insufficient with one speckle modulator M1.
Meff,1+Meff,2<1の場合は、Meff,total=Meff,1+Meff,2
Meff,1+Meff,2≧1の場合は、Meff,total=1
となる。ひとつのスペックルモジュレータM1でスペックル低減効果が足りない場合に有効な構成である。 When the same two speckle modulators M1 are combined, if the effective modulation amplitude factor for each light guide
If M eff, 1 + M eff, 2 <1, then M eff, total = M eff, 1 + M eff, 2
When M eff, 1 + M eff, 2 ≧ 1, M eff, total = 1
It becomes. This configuration is effective when the speckle reduction effect is insufficient with one speckle modulator M1.
図9Bは、駆動機構は異なるが光学的な原理は同じふたつのスペックルモジュレータM1,M2を組み合わせて構成されたスペックルモジュレータ200を模式的に示している。スペックルモジュレータM1は前述した通りである。スペックルモジュレータM2は、第1の光ファイバー124に回転を加えるように構成されている。図9Bには、スペックルモジュレータM2は、代表的に、図6Bに示された導光特性モジュレータ210Bとして描かれている。
FIG. 9B schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators M1 and M2 having different driving mechanisms but the same optical principle. The speckle modulator M1 is as described above. The speckle modulator M2 is configured to rotate the first optical fiber 124. In FIG. 9B, the speckle modulator M2 is typically depicted as the light guide characteristic modulator 210B shown in FIG. 6B.
この場合も、スペックルによる明暗パターンの時間的な重ねあわせ効果を利用するので、光学的には同種のスペックルモジュレータM1,M2を組み合わせる構成であり、基本的には、図9Aと同様に、実効的変調振幅因子が加算されて観測される効果がある。但し、各々のスペックルモジュレータM1,M2で引き起こされるスペックルによる明暗パターン模様が異なる変化をすることがある。このため、多様な明暗パターン模様が重なる効果により、図9Aの構成例の場合よりも、スペックル低減効果がさらに強くなる(すなわち、Meff,total>1となる)ことが多い。
Also in this case, since the temporal superposition effect of the light and dark patterns by speckles is used, it is an optically combined configuration of speckle modulators M1 and M2 of the same type. Basically, as in FIG. 9A, There is an effect observed by adding an effective modulation amplitude factor. However, the light and dark pattern pattern due to speckles caused by the speckle modulators M1 and M2 may change differently. For this reason, due to the effect of overlapping various bright and dark pattern patterns, the speckle reduction effect is often stronger (that is, M eff, total > 1) than in the configuration example of FIG. 9A.
図9Cは、光学的な原理が異なるふたつのスペックルモジュレータM1,M3を組み合わせて構成されたスペックルモジュレータ200を模式的に示している。スペックルモジュレータM1は前述した通りである。スペックルモジュレータM3は、レーザ光の波長を時間的に変化させるように構成されている。図9Cには、スペックルモジュレータM3は、図5に示された波長モジュレータ230として描かれている。
FIG. 9C schematically shows a speckle modulator 200 configured by combining two speckle modulators M1 and M3 having different optical principles. The speckle modulator M1 is as described above. The speckle modulator M3 is configured to change the wavelength of the laser light with time. In FIG. 9C, the speckle modulator M3 is depicted as the wavelength modulator 230 shown in FIG.
光学的な原理が異なるふたつのスペックルモジュレータM1,M3は直列につながれている。この場合は、スペックル低減を引起す光学的な原理が異なるため、Meff,1+Meff,2の大きさに関わらず、Meff,total=Meff,1+Meff,2となる。
Two speckle modulators M1 and M3 having different optical principles are connected in series. In this case, since the speckle reduction caused to optical principles different, M eff, 1 + M eff , 2 of regardless of the size, M eff, the total = M eff, 1 + M eff, 2.
尚、図9Aと図9Bと図9Cの構成について、同期コントローラ240等の作用効果は第1実施形態および第2実施形態と同様である。
In addition, about the structure of FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B, and FIG. 9C, the effect of the synchronous controller 240 grade | etc., Is the same as that of 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment.
[第4実施形態]
図10は、第4実施形態に係る照明装置の全体構成を概略的に示している。図10において、図5や図7に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。 [Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 10 schematically shows the overall configuration of the illumination apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 10, members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
図10は、第4実施形態に係る照明装置の全体構成を概略的に示している。図10において、図5や図7に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。 [Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 10 schematically shows the overall configuration of the illumination apparatus according to the fourth embodiment. 10, members denoted by the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
本実施形態に係る照明装置102Bは、照明光生成器110と、照明光生成器110から射出されたレーザ光を導光する導光光学系120Bと、導光光学系120Bによって導光されたレーザ光を照射する照射光学系140Bを備えている。
The illumination device 102B according to the present embodiment includes an illumination light generator 110, a light guide optical system 120B that guides laser light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a laser guided by the light guide optical system 120B. An irradiation optical system 140B for irradiating light is provided.
導光光学系120Bは、照明光生成器110から射出された光ビームをコリメートするコリメートレンズ122Bと、コリメートレンズ122Bによってコリメートされた光ビームを照射光学系140Bに結合する結合レンズ124Bを備えている。コリメートレンズ122Bと結合レンズ124Bは、図10では模式的に1枚のレンズとして描かれているが、実際には、1枚のレンズで構成されていてもよいし、複数枚のレンズから構成されていてもよい。
The light guide optical system 120B includes a collimating lens 122B that collimates the light beam emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and a coupling lens 124B that couples the light beam collimated by the collimating lens 122B to the irradiation optical system 140B. . The collimating lens 122B and the coupling lens 124B are schematically illustrated as one lens in FIG. 10, but may actually be configured by one lens or may be configured by a plurality of lenses. It may be.
照明装置102Bはまた、スペックルモジュレータ200と同期コントローラ240とパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250を備えている。スペックルモジュレータ200は、導光特性モジュレータ220と、波長モジュレータ230を備えている。導光特性モジュレータ220は、コリメートレンズ122Bと結合レンズ124Bの間のコリメートされた光ビームの光路上に配置されている。
The lighting device 102B also includes a speckle modulator 200, a synchronization controller 240, and a pulse width modulation type light controller 250. The speckle modulator 200 includes a light guide characteristic modulator 220 and a wavelength modulator 230. The light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam between the collimating lens 122B and the coupling lens 124B.
スペックルモジュレータ200と導光特性モジュレータ220と波長モジュレータ230と同期コントローラ240の詳細は、第1実施形態において説明された通りであり、パルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250の詳細は、第2実施形態において説明された通りである。
Details of the speckle modulator 200, the light guide characteristic modulator 220, the wavelength modulator 230, and the synchronization controller 240 are as described in the first embodiment, and details of the pulse width modulation type optical controller 250 are described in the second embodiment. As explained.
イメージャを持たない照明装置102Bでは、スペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅は、生体の画像変化に対する応答時間と考えられる時間内(生体が人間の場合は33msec程度と考えられる)でのスペックルモジュレータ200の駆動強度の変化幅を考えることで、観察者にとって、第1実施形態ないし第3実施形態と同様なスペックル低減効果を得ることができる。
In the illuminating device 102B that does not have an imager, the change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator 200 is speckle within a time period that is considered to be a response time with respect to a change in the image of the living body (about 33 msec when the living body is a human). By considering the change width of the driving intensity of the modulator 200, the observer can obtain the same speckle reduction effect as that of the first to third embodiments.
[第5実施形態]
図11は、第5実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む顕微鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。図11において、図5や図7に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。 [Fifth Embodiment]
FIG. 11 schematically shows the overall configuration of a microscope system including an imaging system according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 11, members having the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
図11は、第5実施形態に係る撮像システムを含む顕微鏡システムの全体構成を概略的に示している。図11において、図5や図7に示した部材と同一の参照符号を付した部材は同様の部材であり、その詳しい説明は省略する。 [Fifth Embodiment]
FIG. 11 schematically shows the overall configuration of a microscope system including an imaging system according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 11, members having the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 7 are similar members, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
本実施形態に係る撮像システム100Cは、観察対象190を照明する照明装置102Cと、撮像装置104を備えている。
The imaging system 100 </ b> C according to the present embodiment includes an illumination device 102 </ b> C that illuminates the observation object 190 and the imaging device 104.
照明装置102Cは、照明光生成器110と、照明光生成器110から射出されたレーザ光を導光する導光光学系120Cと、導光光学系120Cによって導光されたレーザ光を照射する照明光学系300を備えている。
The illumination device 102C includes an illumination light generator 110, a light guide optical system 120C that guides laser light emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and illumination that emits laser light guided by the light guide optical system 120C. An optical system 300 is provided.
導光光学系120Cは、レーザ光を導光する光ファイバー126Cと、照明光生成器110から射出された光ビームをコリメートするコリメートレンズ122Cと、コリメートレンズ122Cによってコリメートされた光ビームを光ファイバー126Cに結合するファイバー結合レンズ124Cを備えている。コリメートレンズ122Cとファイバー結合レンズ124Cは、図11では模式的に1枚のレンズとして描かれているが、実際には、1枚のレンズで構成されていてもよいし、複数枚のレンズから構成されていてもよい。
The light guide optical system 120C couples the optical fiber 126C that guides the laser light, the collimator lens 122C that collimates the light beam emitted from the illumination light generator 110, and the light beam collimated by the collimator lens 122C to the optical fiber 126C. A fiber coupling lens 124C is provided. The collimating lens 122C and the fiber coupling lens 124C are schematically illustrated as one lens in FIG. 11, but may actually be configured by one lens or may be configured by a plurality of lenses. May be.
照明光学系300は、光ファイバー126Cから射出された光ビームをコリメートするコリメート光学系310と、コリメート光学系310によってコリメートされた光ビームを2本の光ビームに分割するビームスプリッター320と、ビームスプリッター320によって分割された一方の光ビームを反射する第1のミラー330Aと、第1のミラー330Aによって反射された光ビームを、試料台350に載せられた観察対象190に向けて下方から照射する第1の照射光学系340Aと、ビームスプリッター320によって分割された他方の光ビームを反射する第2のミラー330Bと、第2のミラー330Bによって反射された光ビームを観察対象190に向けて斜め上方から照射する第2の照射光学系340Bを備えている。
The illumination optical system 300 includes a collimating optical system 310 that collimates the light beam emitted from the optical fiber 126C, a beam splitter 320 that splits the light beam collimated by the collimating optical system 310 into two light beams, and a beam splitter 320. The first mirror 330A that reflects one of the light beams divided by the first mirror 330A and the first light beam that is reflected by the first mirror 330A toward the observation object 190 placed on the sample stage 350 from below. Irradiation optical system 340A, the second mirror 330B that reflects the other light beam split by the beam splitter 320, and the light beam reflected by the second mirror 330B toward the observation object 190 from above obliquely. The second irradiation optical system 340B is provided.
照明装置102Cはまた、スペックルモジュレータ200と同期コントローラ240とパルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250を備えている。スペックルモジュレータ200は、第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と、第2の導光特性モジュレータ220と、波長モジュレータ230を備えている。第2の導光特性モジュレータ220は、コリメートレンズ122Cとファイバー結合レンズ124Cの間のコリメートされた光ビームの光路上に配置されている。第1の導光特性モジュレータ210は、光ファイバー126Cの中間部に配置されている。
The illumination device 102 </ b> C also includes a speckle modulator 200, a synchronization controller 240, and a pulse width modulation type light controller 250. The speckle modulator 200 includes a first light guide characteristic modulator 210, a second light guide characteristic modulator 220, and a wavelength modulator 230. The second light guide characteristic modulator 220 is disposed on the optical path of the collimated light beam between the collimating lens 122C and the fiber coupling lens 124C. The first light guide characteristic modulator 210 is disposed in the middle part of the optical fiber 126C.
スペックルモジュレータ200と第1の導光特性モジュレータ210と第2の導光特性モジュレータ220と波長モジュレータ230と同期コントローラ240の詳細は、第1実施形態において説明された通りであり、パルス幅変調方式光コントローラ250の詳細は、第2実施形態において説明された通りである。
The details of the speckle modulator 200, the first light guide characteristic modulator 210, the second light guide characteristic modulator 220, the wavelength modulator 230, and the synchronous controller 240 are as described in the first embodiment, and the pulse width modulation method. Details of the light controller 250 are as described in the second embodiment.
撮像システム100Cはまた、試料台350に向き合うように配置される対物光学系360と、対物光学系360を支持する鏡筒370と、鏡筒370に取り付けられる接眼および撮像光学系380を備えている。
The imaging system 100 </ b> C also includes an objective optical system 360 disposed to face the sample stage 350, a lens barrel 370 that supports the objective optical system 360, and an eyepiece and imaging optical system 380 attached to the lens barrel 370. .
導光光学系120Cから射出されたレーザ光は、コリメート光学系310を経て、ビームスプリッター320によって2本の光ビームに分割される。一方の光ビームは、第1のミラー330Aによって反射され、第1の照射光学系340Aを介して観察対象190に向けて下方から照射される。また、他方の光ビームは、第2のミラー330Bによって反射され、第2の照射光学系340Bを介して観察対象190に斜め上方から照射される。
The laser light emitted from the light guiding optical system 120C is split into two light beams by the beam splitter 320 through the collimating optical system 310. One light beam is reflected by the first mirror 330A, and is irradiated from below onto the observation object 190 via the first irradiation optical system 340A. Further, the other light beam is reflected by the second mirror 330B, and is irradiated on the observation object 190 from obliquely above via the second irradiation optical system 340B.
観察対象190に照射された光は、観察対象190によって反射、回折、散乱等される。観察対象190によって反射、回折、散乱等された光の一部は、対物光学系360に入射する。対物光学系360に入射した光は、例えば、接眼および撮像光学系380を介してイメージャ150の受光面に結像され、イメージャ150によって観察対象190の画像情報が取得される。イメージャ150によって取得された画像情報は、画像処理回路160によって画像処理が行われた後、ディスプレイ170に表示される。または、対物光学系360に入射した光は、接眼および撮像光学系380を介して観察者の網膜に結像され、観察者によって観察対象190の画像が観察される。
The light irradiated on the observation object 190 is reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190. A part of the light reflected, diffracted, scattered, etc. by the observation object 190 enters the objective optical system 360. The light incident on the objective optical system 360 is imaged on the light receiving surface of the imager 150 via the eyepiece and the imaging optical system 380, for example, and image information of the observation object 190 is acquired by the imager 150. The image information acquired by the imager 150 is displayed on the display 170 after image processing is performed by the image processing circuit 160. Alternatively, the light incident on the objective optical system 360 is imaged on the retina of the observer via the eyepiece and the imaging optical system 380, and the image of the observation object 190 is observed by the observer.
本実施形態に係る撮像システム100Cを含む顕微鏡システムにおいて、スペックル低減に関する作用・効果については、第1実施形態ないし第4実施形態で得られる作用・効果と同様である。
In the microscope system including the imaging system 100C according to the present embodiment, the operations and effects related to speckle reduction are the same as the operations and effects obtained in the first to fourth embodiments.
[まとめ]
以上をまとめると、本明細書には、以下に列記する照明装置と撮像システムが開示されている。言い換えれば、上述した実施形態は、以下に示す通り一般化できる。 [Summary]
Summarizing the above, the present specification discloses an illumination device and an imaging system listed below. In other words, the embodiment described above can be generalized as shown below.
以上をまとめると、本明細書には、以下に列記する照明装置と撮像システムが開示されている。言い換えれば、上述した実施形態は、以下に示す通り一般化できる。 [Summary]
Summarizing the above, the present specification discloses an illumination device and an imaging system listed below. In other words, the embodiment described above can be generalized as shown below.
[1] コヒーレント光の照明パルスを生成する照明パルス生成器と、
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する照明装置。 [1] An illumination pulse generator that generates an illumination pulse of coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
An illumination apparatus comprising: a synchronous controller that controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator and the drive timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する照明装置。 [1] An illumination pulse generator that generates an illumination pulse of coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
An illumination apparatus comprising: a synchronous controller that controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator and the drive timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
[2] 前記同期コントローラは、少なくとも前記照明パルス1個あたりのパルス発光期間(tpw,ill)において、前記スペックルモジュレータが動作するように制御する[1]に記載の照明装置。
[2] The illumination device according to [1], wherein the synchronous controller controls the speckle modulator to operate in at least a pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) per one illumination pulse.
[3] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、周期的に前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)を変化させる[2]に記載の照明装置。
[3] The illumination device according to [2], wherein the speckle modulator periodically changes a driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator.
[4] 前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[3]に記載の照明装置。
[4] When the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a period of less than ½ of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) The illumination device according to [3], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled so as to include a time at which a change rate of the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized.
[5] 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻となるように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[4]に記載の照明装置。
[5] The synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a time at which a change rate of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized. The illumination device according to [4], which controls an illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator.
[6] 前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間が(tpw,ill)、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[3]に記載の照明装置。
[6] When the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a period less than ½ of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ). The illumination device according to [3], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is included.
[7] 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[6]に記載の照明装置。
[7] In the synchronous controller, the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) includes a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a value between the substantial maximum value and the minimum value. The illumination device according to [6], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled.
[8] 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[7]に記載の照明装置。
[8] The synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between a maximum value and a minimum value. The illumination device according to [7], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled.
[9] 前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2以上の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[3]に記載の照明装置。
[9] When the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is a period that is ½ or more of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller has the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) The illumination device according to [3], wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled such that the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator includes a time at which a maximum value and a time at which a minimum value is taken. .
[10] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、第1のスペックルモジュレータと第2のスペックルモジュレータを含み、前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと、前記第1のスペックルモジュレータおよび/または前記第2のスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングとを同期させて制御する[1]に記載の照明装置。
[10] The speckle modulator includes a first speckle modulator and a second speckle modulator, and the synchronous controller includes a pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the first speckle modulator, and / or Or the illuminating device as described in [1] controlled in synchronization with the drive timing of the second speckle modulator.
[11] 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)としたとき、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)以上に設定される[2]に記載の照明装置。
[11] When the change range of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator, in which the reduction of the speckle is saturated with respect to the change of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator, is the drive intensity threshold width (ΔI mod, th ), The driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the modulator is set to a driving intensity threshold (ΔI mod, th ) or more, [2].
[12] 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)における前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅(ΔImod)が駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)以上の値となるように設定される[11]に記載の照明装置。
[12] The drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is such that the change width (ΔI mod ) of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator in the pulse emission period (t pw, ill ) is the drive intensity threshold. The illumination device according to [11], which is set to have a value equal to or greater than (ΔI mod, th ).
[13] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の位相を時間的に変化させる位相モジュレータを有する[1]または[2]に記載の照明装置。
[13] The illumination device according to [1] or [2], wherein the speckle modulator includes a phase modulator that temporally changes a phase of the coherent light.
[14] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系に含まれる導光部材に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置を有する[13]に記載の照明装置。
[14] The illumination device according to [13], wherein the phase modulator includes a light guide member changing device that mechanically changes a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[15] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸板を有する[13]に記載の照明装置。
[15] The illumination device according to [13], wherein the phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
[16] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系の屈折率を時間的に変化させる屈折率モジュレータである[13]に記載の照明装置。
[16] The illumination device according to [13], wherein the phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[17] 前記屈折率モジュレータは、少なくとも電気光学素子と音響光学素子のいずれかを有する[16]に記載の照明装置。
[17] The illumination device according to [16], wherein the refractive index modulator includes at least one of an electro-optic element and an acousto-optic element.
[18] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記光ファイバーのコア直径をΦcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記導光部材変動装置による前記光ファイバーの振動の変位にして5Φc以上である[14]に記載の照明装置。
[18] When the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and the core diameter of the optical fiber is Φc, the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device. The illumination device according to [14], wherein the displacement is 5Φc or more.
[19] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°以上である[14]に記載の照明装置。
[19] The illumination device according to [14], wherein the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and a driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more in terms of an angle at which the optical fiber is twisted.
[20] 前記屈折率モジュレータの導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記屈折率モジュレータの屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmである[16]に記載の照明装置。
[20] When the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the illumination device according to [16], wherein Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
[21] [2]~[12]のいずれかひとつに記載の照明装置と、所定の露光期間(tpw,exp)で撮像を行うイメージャを有する撮像システム。
[21] An imaging system including the illumination device according to any one of [2] to [12] and an imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period (t pw, exp ).
[22] 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御する[21]に記載の撮像システム。
[22] The imaging system according to [21], wherein the synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization.
[23] 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、前記イメージャの露光期間(tpw,exp)において、前記照明パルス生成器が前記照明パルスを生成するように制御する[21]に記載の撮像システム。
[23] The synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization, and in the exposure period (t pw, exp ) of the imager The imaging system according to [21], wherein the illumination pulse generator is controlled to generate the illumination pulse.
[24] 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期(tmod)に対して、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦2M0tpw,illで駆動する[21]に記載の撮像システム。 [24] The synchronous controller synchronizes and controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager,
Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
The change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width (ΔI mod, th ),
The pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator;
For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The imaging system according to [21], wherein the synchronous controller drives the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator with M 0 ≧ 1 and further drives with t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, ill .
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期(tmod)に対して、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦2M0tpw,illで駆動する[21]に記載の撮像システム。 [24] The synchronous controller synchronizes and controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager,
Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
The change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width (ΔI mod, th ),
The pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator;
For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The imaging system according to [21], wherein the synchronous controller drives the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator with M 0 ≧ 1 and further drives with t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, ill .
[25] 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期(tmod)に対して、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tpw,ill<tmod≦M0tpw,illで駆動する[21]に記載の撮像システム。 [25] The synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization with each other,
Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
The change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width (ΔI mod, th ),
The pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator;
For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The synchronous controller, the lighting pulse generator and the speckle modulator driven at M 0 ≧ 1, further, t pw, imaging according to ill <t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, driven by ill [21] system.
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間(tpw,ill)、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期(tmod)に対して、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tpw,ill<tmod≦M0tpw,illで駆動する[21]に記載の撮像システム。 [25] The synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization with each other,
Drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator,
The change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width (ΔI mod, th ),
The pulse emission period ( tpw, ill ) of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator;
For the modulation period (t mod ) when the speckle modulator is driven periodically,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The synchronous controller, the lighting pulse generator and the speckle modulator driven at M 0 ≧ 1, further, t pw, imaging according to ill <t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, driven by ill [21] system.
[26] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の位相を時間的に変化させる位相モジュレータを有する[21]に記載の撮像システム。
[26] The imaging system according to [21], wherein the speckle modulator includes a phase modulator that temporally changes the phase of the coherent light.
[27] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系に含まれる導光部材に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置を有する[26]に記載の撮像システム。
[27] The imaging system according to [26], wherein the phase modulator includes a light guide member variation device that mechanically varies a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[28] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸板を有する[26]に記載の撮像システム。
[28] The imaging system according to [26], wherein the phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
[29]前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系の屈折率を時間的に変化させる屈折率モジュレータである[26]に記載の撮像システム。
[29] The imaging system according to [26], wherein the phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[30]前記屈折率モジュレータは、少なくとも電気光学素子と音響光学素子のいずれかを有する[29]に記載の撮像システム。
[30] The imaging system according to [29], wherein the refractive index modulator includes at least one of an electro-optic element and an acousto-optic element.
[31] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記光ファイバーのコア直径をΦcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記導光部材変動装置による前記光ファイバーの振動の変位にして5Φc以上である[27]に記載の撮像システム。
[31] When the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and the core diameter of the optical fiber is Φc, the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device. The imaging system according to [27], wherein the displacement is 5Φc or more.
[32] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°以上である[27]に記載の撮像システム。
[32] The imaging system according to [27], wherein the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and a driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more when the optical fiber is twisted.
[33] 前記屈折率モジュレータの導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記屈折率モジュレータの屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmである[29]に記載の撮像システム。
[33] When the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the imaging system according to [29], wherein Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
[34] [21]~[33]のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する内視鏡システム。
[34] An endoscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [21] to [33], wherein the imaging system further performs image processing on an image captured by the imager. An endoscope system including a circuit and an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
[35] [21]~[33]のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む顕微鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する顕微鏡システム。
[35] A microscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [21] to [33], wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager. A microscope system having an image display unit for displaying an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
[36] コヒーレント光を生成する照明光生成器と、
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
所定の露光期間(tpw,exp)で撮像を行うイメージャを有し、
前記イメージャの撮像タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する撮像システム。 [36] An illumination light generator for generating coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
An imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period (t pw, exp );
An imaging system having a synchronization controller that controls the imaging timing of the imager and the driving timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
所定の露光期間(tpw,exp)で撮像を行うイメージャを有し、
前記イメージャの撮像タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する撮像システム。 [36] An illumination light generator for generating coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
An imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period (t pw, exp );
An imaging system having a synchronization controller that controls the imaging timing of the imager and the driving timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization.
[37] 前記同期コントローラは、少なくとも前記露光期間(tpw,exp)において、前記スペックルモジュレータが動作するように制御する[36]に記載の撮像システム。
[37] The imaging system according to [36], wherein the synchronous controller controls the speckle modulator to operate at least in the exposure period (t pw, exp ).
[38] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、周期的に前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)を変化させる[36]または[37]に記載の撮像システム。
[38] The imaging system according to [36] or [37], wherein the speckle modulator periodically changes a driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator.
[39] 前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻を含むように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[38]に記載の撮像システム。
[39] When the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a period of less than half of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp ) [38] The imaging system according to [38], wherein the imager and the speckle modulator are controlled so as to include a time at which a change rate of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized.
[40] 前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻となるように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[39]に記載の撮像システム。
[40] The synchronous controller may be configured such that the center of the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a time at which the rate of change of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized. And [39] for controlling the speckle modulator.
[41] 前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)の最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[38]に記載の撮像システム。
[41] When the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a period less than ½ of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp ) The imaging system according to [38], wherein the imager and the speckle modulator are controlled so that neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator is included.
[42] 前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[41]に記載の撮像システム。
[42] In the synchronous controller, the exposure period (t pw, exp ) includes a time at which the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between a maximum value and a minimum value. The imaging system according to [41], which controls the imager and the speckle modulator.
[43] 前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[42]に記載の撮像システム。
[43] In the synchronous controller, the center of the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a time at which the driving intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between the maximum value and the minimum value. As described above, the imaging system according to [42], which controls the imager and the speckle modulator.
[44] 前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、スペックル変調周期(tmod)の1/2以上の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度(Imod)が最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、前記イメージャと前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する[38]に記載の撮像システム。
[44] When the exposure period (t pw, exp ) is a period of ½ or more of the speckle modulation period (t mod ), the synchronous controller determines that the exposure period (t pw, exp ) [38] The imaging system according to [38], wherein the imager and the speckle modulator are controlled such that the drive intensity (I mod ) of the speckle modulator includes a time when the maximum value is taken and a time when the speckle modulator takes the minimum value.
[45] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、第1のスペックルモジュレータと第2のスペックルモジュレータを含み、前記同期コントローラは、前記イメージャの露光タイミングと、前記第1のスペックルモジュレータおよび/または前記第2のスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングとを同期させて制御する[36]に記載の撮像システム。
[45] The speckle modulator includes a first speckle modulator and a second speckle modulator, and the synchronous controller includes an exposure timing of the imager, the first speckle modulator, and / or the second speckle modulator. The imaging system according to [36], wherein the control is performed in synchronization with the drive timing of the speckle modulator.
[46] 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)としたとき、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)以上に設定される[36]または[37]に記載の撮像システム。
[46] When the change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator that the speckle reduction is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is a drive strength threshold width (ΔI mod, th ), The imaging system according to [36] or [37], wherein the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the modulator is set to be equal to or larger than the driving intensity threshold (ΔI mod, th ).
[47] 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記露光期間(tpw,exp)における前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅(ΔImod)が駆動強度しきい幅(ΔImod,th)以上の値となるように設定される[46]に記載の撮像システム。
[47] The drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is equal to the drive intensity threshold width (ΔI mod ) of the drive intensity change width (ΔI mod ) of the speckle modulator in the exposure period (t pw, exp ). The imaging system according to [46], which is set to have a value equal to or greater than ΔI mod, th ).
[48] 前記スペックルモジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の位相を時間的に変化させる位相モジュレータを有する[36]に記載の撮像システム。
[48] The imaging system according to [36], wherein the speckle modulator includes a phase modulator that temporally changes the phase of the coherent light.
[49] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系に含まれる導光部材に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置を有する[48]に記載の撮像システム。
[49] The imaging system according to [48], wherein the phase modulator includes a light guide member variation device that mechanically varies a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[50] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸板を有する[48]に記載の撮像システム。
[50] The imaging system according to [48], wherein the phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
[51] 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系の屈折率を時間的に変化させる屈折率モジュレータである[48]に記載の撮像システム。
[51] The imaging system according to [48], wherein the phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
[52] 前記屈折率モジュレータは、少なくとも電気光学素子と音響光学素子のいずれかを有する[51]に記載の撮像システム。
[52] The imaging system according to [51], wherein the refractive index modulator includes at least one of an electro-optic element and an acousto-optic element.
[53] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記光ファイバーのコア直径をΦcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記導光部材変動装置による前記光ファイバーの振動の変位にして5Φc以上である[49]に記載の撮像システム。
[53] When the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and the core diameter of the optical fiber is Φc, the drive intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member fluctuation device. The imaging system according to [49], wherein the displacement is 5Φc or more.
[54] 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°以上である[49]に記載の撮像システム。
[54] The imaging system according to [49], wherein the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and a driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more when the optical fiber is twisted.
[55] 前記屈折率モジュレータの導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅(Imod,0)は、前記屈折率モジュレータの屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmである[51]に記載の撮像システム。
[55] When the length in the light guide direction of the refractive index modulator is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the driving intensity amplitude (I mod, 0 ) is the imaging system according to [51], wherein Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm in terms of a change in refractive index of the refractive index modulator.
[56] [36]~[55]のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する内視鏡システム。
[56] An endoscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [36] to [55], wherein the imaging system further performs image processing on an image captured by the imager. An endoscope system including a circuit and an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
[57] [36]~[55]のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む顕微鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する顕微鏡システム。
[57] A microscope system including the imaging system according to any one of [36] to [55], wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager; A microscope system having an image display unit for displaying an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
Claims (30)
- コヒーレント光の照明パルスを生成する照明パルス生成器と、
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する照明装置。 An illumination pulse generator for generating an illumination pulse of coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
An illumination apparatus comprising: a synchronous controller that controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator and the drive timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization. - 前記同期コントローラは、少なくとも前記照明パルス1個あたりのパルス発光期間において、前記スペックルモジュレータが動作するように制御する請求項1に記載の照明装置。 The illumination device according to claim 1, wherein the synchronous controller controls the speckle modulator to operate at least in a pulse emission period per one illumination pulse.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータは、周期的に前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度を変化させる請求項2に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 2, wherein the speckle modulator periodically changes the driving strength of the speckle modulator.
- 前記パルス発光期間が、スペックル変調周期の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項3に記載の照明装置。 When the pulse emission period is a period less than half of the speckle modulation period, the synchronous controller determines that the pulse emission period is a time at which the rate of change of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized. The illumination device according to claim 3, wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled to include
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化率が実質的に最大となる時刻となるように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項4に記載の照明装置。 The synchronous controller controls the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator so that a center of the pulse emission period is a time at which a change rate of a driving intensity of the speckle modulator is substantially maximized. Item 5. The lighting device according to Item 4.
- 前記パルス発光期間が、スペックル変調周期の1/2未満の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の最大値と最小値のいずれも含まないように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項3に記載の照明装置。 When the pulse emission period is a period less than half of the speckle modulation period, the synchronous controller includes the pulse emission period that includes neither the maximum value nor the minimum value of the driving intensity of the speckle modulator. The illumination device according to claim 3, wherein the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled.
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項6に記載の照明装置。 The synchronous controller includes the illumination pulse generator and the speckle modulator so that the pulse emission period includes a time at which the driving intensity of the speckle modulator takes a substantial center value between a maximum value and a minimum value. The lighting device according to claim 6 to be controlled.
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間の中心が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度が実質的な最大値と最小値の中心の値を取る時刻となるように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項7に記載の照明装置。 The synchronization controller may be configured such that the center of the pulse emission period is a time at which the driving intensity of the speckle modulator takes a center value between a substantial maximum value and a minimum value. The lighting device according to claim 7, wherein the lighting device controls the modulator.
- 前記パルス発光期間が、スペックル変調周期の1/2以上の期間である場合、前記同期コントローラは、前記パルス発光期間が、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度が最大値を取る時刻と最小値を取る時刻を含むように、前記照明パルス生成器と前記スペックルモジュレータを制御する請求項3に記載の照明装置。 When the pulse light emission period is a period of ½ or more of the speckle modulation period, the synchronous controller takes the time when the drive intensity of the speckle modulator takes the maximum value and the minimum value. The lighting device according to claim 3, wherein the lighting pulse generator and the speckle modulator are controlled so as to include time.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータは、第1のスペックルモジュレータと第2のスペックルモジュレータを含み、前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと、前記第1のスペックルモジュレータおよび/または前記第2のスペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングとを同期させて制御する請求項1に記載の照明装置。 The speckle modulator includes a first speckle modulator and a second speckle modulator, and the synchronous controller includes a pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the first speckle modulator, and / or the second speckle modulator. The lighting device according to claim 1, wherein the lighting device is controlled in synchronization with a drive timing of the second speckle modulator.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅としたとき、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅は、駆動強度しきい幅以上に設定される請求項2に記載の照明装置。 When the change width of the drive strength of the speckle modulator where the reduction of the speckle is saturated with respect to the drive strength change of the speckle modulator is the drive strength threshold, the drive strength amplitude of the speckle modulator is the drive The lighting device according to claim 2, wherein the lighting device is set to be equal to or greater than an intensity threshold width.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅は、前記パルス発光期間における前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅が駆動強度しきい幅以上の値となるように設定される請求項11に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 11, wherein the drive intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is set such that a change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator in the pulse emission period is equal to or greater than a drive intensity threshold.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の位相を時間的に変化させる位相モジュレータを有する請求項1または請求項2に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the speckle modulator includes a phase modulator that temporally changes the phase of the coherent light.
- 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系に含まれる導光部材に機械的な変動を加える導光部材変動装置を有する請求項13に記載の照明装置。 14. The illumination device according to claim 13, wherein the phase modulator has a light guide member changing device that mechanically changes a light guide member included in a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光の波長の1/10よりも大きな凹凸を持つ凹凸板を有する請求項13に記載の照明装置。 The illuminating device according to claim 13, wherein the phase modulator has a concavo-convex plate having a concavo-convex greater than 1/10 of the wavelength of the coherent light.
- 前記位相モジュレータは、前記コヒーレント光を導光する導光光学系の屈折率を時間的に変化させる屈折率モジュレータである請求項13に記載の照明装置。 The lighting device according to claim 13, wherein the phase modulator is a refractive index modulator that temporally changes a refractive index of a light guide optical system that guides the coherent light.
- 前記屈折率モジュレータは、少なくとも電気光学素子と音響光学素子のいずれかを有する請求項16に記載の照明装置。 The illumination device according to claim 16, wherein the refractive index modulator includes at least one of an electro-optic element and an acousto-optic element.
- 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記光ファイバーのコア直径をΦcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅は、前記導光部材変動装置による前記光ファイバーの振動の変位にして5Φc以上である請求項14に記載の照明装置。 The light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and assuming that the core diameter of the optical fiber is Φc, the drive intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is 5Φc or more in terms of the displacement of the vibration of the optical fiber by the light guide member variation device. Item 15. The lighting device according to Item 14.
- 前記導光光学系は光ファイバーを含み、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅は、前記光ファイバーを捻る角度にして10°以上である請求項14に記載の照明装置。 The illuminating device according to claim 14, wherein the light guide optical system includes an optical fiber, and the driving intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is 10 ° or more when the optical fiber is twisted.
- 前記屈折率モジュレータの導光方向の長さをLm、屈折率の変化をΔn/n、前記照明パルスのスペクトルの中心波長をλcとすると、前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅は、前記屈折率モジュレータの屈折率変化にしてΔn/n≧λc/Lmである請求項16に記載の照明装置。 When the length of the refractive index modulator in the light guide direction is Lm, the change in refractive index is Δn / n, and the center wavelength of the spectrum of the illumination pulse is λc, the drive intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is the refractive index modulator. The illumination device according to claim 16, wherein Δn / n ≧ λc / Lm with respect to a change in refractive index.
- 請求項2~請求項12のいずれかひとつに記載の照明装置と、所定の露光期間で撮像を行うイメージャを有する撮像システム。 An imaging system comprising: the illumination device according to any one of claims 2 to 12; and an imager that performs imaging in a predetermined exposure period.
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御する請求項21に記載の撮像システム。 The imaging system according to claim 21, wherein the synchronization controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization.
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、前記イメージャの露光期間において、前記照明パルス生成器が前記照明パルスを生成するように制御する請求項21に記載の撮像システム。 The synchronization controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the driving timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization, and the illumination pulse generator is configured to control the illumination during the exposure period of the imager. The imaging system according to claim 21, wherein the imaging system is controlled to generate a pulse.
- 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅をImod,0、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅をΔImod,th、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間をtpw,ill、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期をtmodとし、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tmod≦2M0tpw,illで駆動する請求項21に記載の撮像システム。 The synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization,
The drive intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is defined as I mod, 0 ,
The change width of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator that the reduction of the speckle is saturated with respect to the change of the drive intensity of the speckle modulator is expressed as ΔI mod, th ,
T pw, ill , the pulse emission period of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator,
The modulation period when the speckle modulator is periodically driven is t mod ,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The imaging system according to claim 21, wherein the synchronous controller drives the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator with M 0 ≧ 1, and further drives with t mod ≦ 2M 0 t pw, ill . - 前記同期コントローラは、前記照明パルス生成器のパルス生成タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングと前記イメージャの撮像タイミングを同期させて制御し、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度振幅をImod,0、
前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化に対してスペックルの低減が飽和する前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度の変化幅を駆動強度しきい幅をΔImod,th、
前記照明パルス生成器が生成する前記照明パルスの前記パルス発光期間をtpw,ill、
前記スペックルモジュレータを周期的に駆動する時の変調周期をtmodとし、
M0=Imod,0/ΔImod,thとしたときに、
前記同期コントローラは、前記スペックルモジュレータと前記照明パルス生成器をM0≧1で駆動し、更に、tpw,ill<tmod≦M0tpw,illで駆動する請求項21に記載の撮像システム。 The synchronous controller controls the pulse generation timing of the illumination pulse generator, the drive timing of the speckle modulator, and the imaging timing of the imager in synchronization,
The drive intensity amplitude of the speckle modulator is defined as I mod, 0 ,
The speckle modulator of the speckle modulator [Delta] I mod the drive strength threshold width variation width of the drive strength reduction of speckle is saturated with respect to a change in drive strength, th,
The pulse emission period of the illumination pulse generated by the illumination pulse generator is expressed as t pw, ill ,
The modulation period when the speckle modulator is periodically driven is t mod ,
When M 0 = I mod, 0 / ΔI mod, th ,
The imaging according to claim 21, wherein the synchronous controller drives the speckle modulator and the illumination pulse generator with M 0 ≧ 1, and further drives with t pw, ill <t mod ≦ M 0 t pw, ill. system. - 請求項21~請求項25のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む内視鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する内視鏡システム。 An endoscope system including the imaging system according to any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager; An endoscope system having an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by the image processing circuit.
- 請求項21~請求項25のいずれかひとつに記載の撮像システムを含む顕微鏡システムであり、前記撮像システムはさらに、前記イメージャにより撮像された画像に対して画像処理を行う画像処理回路と、前記画像処理回路により画像処理が行われた画像を表示する画像表示部を有する顕微鏡システム。 A microscope system including the imaging system according to any one of claims 21 to 25, wherein the imaging system further includes an image processing circuit that performs image processing on an image captured by the imager, and the image A microscope system having an image display unit that displays an image subjected to image processing by a processing circuit.
- コヒーレント光を生成する照明光生成器と、
前記コヒーレント光によって生じるスペックルを変調するスペックルモジュレータと、
所定の露光期間で撮像を行うイメージャを有し、
前記イメージャの撮像タイミングと前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動タイミングを同期させて制御する同期コントローラを有する撮像システム。 An illumination light generator for generating coherent light;
A speckle modulator that modulates speckle generated by the coherent light;
Having an imager for imaging in a predetermined exposure period;
An imaging system having a synchronization controller that controls the imaging timing of the imager and the driving timing of the speckle modulator in synchronization. - 前記同期コントローラは、少なくとも前記露光期間において、前記スペックルモジュレータが動作するように制御する請求項28に記載の撮像システム。 29. The imaging system according to claim 28, wherein the synchronous controller controls the speckle modulator to operate at least during the exposure period.
- 前記スペックルモジュレータは、周期的に前記スペックルモジュレータの駆動強度を変化させる請求項28または請求項29に記載の撮像システム。 30. The imaging system according to claim 28 or 29, wherein the speckle modulator periodically changes the driving intensity of the speckle modulator.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/018894 WO2018211704A1 (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2017-05-19 | Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system |
CN201780090922.8A CN110637250A (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2017-05-19 | Illumination device, imaging system including the illumination device, endoscope system and microscope system including the imaging system |
US16/687,823 US20200081264A1 (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2019-11-19 | Illuminating device, imaging system, imaging system including the illuminating device, endoscope system including the imaging system, and microscope system including the imaging system |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/018894 WO2018211704A1 (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2017-05-19 | Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/687,823 Continuation US20200081264A1 (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2019-11-19 | Illuminating device, imaging system, imaging system including the illuminating device, endoscope system including the imaging system, and microscope system including the imaging system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2018211704A1 true WO2018211704A1 (en) | 2018-11-22 |
Family
ID=64273520
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2017/018894 WO2018211704A1 (en) | 2017-05-19 | 2017-05-19 | Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US20200081264A1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN110637250A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2018211704A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2022176208A1 (en) * | 2021-02-22 | 2022-08-25 | 株式会社 ジャパンセル | Predetermined light generation method, predetermined light utilization method, service provision method using predetermined light, measurement/imaging method, optical characteristic conversion element, light source unit, measurement unit, observation device, predetermined light utilization device and service provision system |
Families Citing this family (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP7025661B2 (en) * | 2019-06-19 | 2022-02-25 | 日亜化学工業株式会社 | Light source device and image acquisition device |
US20200397267A1 (en) * | 2019-06-20 | 2020-12-24 | Ethicon Llc | Speckle removal in a pulsed fluorescence imaging system |
DE102022108738A1 (en) * | 2022-04-11 | 2023-10-12 | Carl Zeiss GOM Metrology GmbH | Measuring unit and method for the optical measurement of objects |
CN115268058B (en) * | 2022-08-03 | 2025-09-26 | 深圳迈塔兰斯科技有限公司 | Phase-controlled metamaterial, device, and radiation modulation method |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2008506426A (en) * | 2004-07-02 | 2008-03-06 | ザ ジェネラル ホスピタル コーポレイション | Endoscopic imaging probe with double clad fiber |
JP2008253736A (en) * | 2008-02-18 | 2008-10-23 | Nichia Corp | Driving method of light emitting device and light emitting device |
JP2012226292A (en) * | 2011-04-04 | 2012-11-15 | Sony Corp | Luminaire and display device |
JP2013156555A (en) * | 2012-01-31 | 2013-08-15 | V Technology Co Ltd | Laser illumination apparatus |
-
2017
- 2017-05-19 CN CN201780090922.8A patent/CN110637250A/en active Pending
- 2017-05-19 WO PCT/JP2017/018894 patent/WO2018211704A1/en active Application Filing
-
2019
- 2019-11-19 US US16/687,823 patent/US20200081264A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2008506426A (en) * | 2004-07-02 | 2008-03-06 | ザ ジェネラル ホスピタル コーポレイション | Endoscopic imaging probe with double clad fiber |
JP2008253736A (en) * | 2008-02-18 | 2008-10-23 | Nichia Corp | Driving method of light emitting device and light emitting device |
JP2012226292A (en) * | 2011-04-04 | 2012-11-15 | Sony Corp | Luminaire and display device |
JP2013156555A (en) * | 2012-01-31 | 2013-08-15 | V Technology Co Ltd | Laser illumination apparatus |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2022176208A1 (en) * | 2021-02-22 | 2022-08-25 | 株式会社 ジャパンセル | Predetermined light generation method, predetermined light utilization method, service provision method using predetermined light, measurement/imaging method, optical characteristic conversion element, light source unit, measurement unit, observation device, predetermined light utilization device and service provision system |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US20200081264A1 (en) | 2020-03-12 |
CN110637250A (en) | 2019-12-31 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
WO2018211704A1 (en) | Lighting apparatus, imaging system containing said lighting apparatus, and microscope system and endoscope system containing said imaging system | |
US7969644B2 (en) | System and method for despeckling an image illuminated by a coherent light source | |
EP3404452B1 (en) | Projection type image display apparatus and corresponding method | |
JP4290095B2 (en) | Display optical system and image display system | |
JP6304337B2 (en) | Illumination device, projection device, and projection-type image display device | |
JP5978612B2 (en) | Illumination device and display device | |
JP5168936B2 (en) | Projection type display device and illumination device | |
US8068267B2 (en) | Speckle reduction in display systems that employ coherent light sources | |
WO2014064964A1 (en) | Optical scanning device and light source device | |
JP5979481B2 (en) | Illumination device, projection device, and projection-type image display device | |
AU2018298130A1 (en) | Speckle-reduction in virtual and augmented reality systems and methods | |
JP2009527772A (en) | Apparatus and method for speckle reduction by angular scanning for laser projection display | |
JP2012226292A (en) | Luminaire and display device | |
JP2013044800A (en) | Illumination device and display device | |
KR20100009977A (en) | Projection display apparatus for suppressing speckle noise | |
JP2014041130A (en) | Tomographic image generation apparatus, and method of operating the same | |
TW202138872A (en) | Near-eye image projection system having foveated projection and expanded eye-box region | |
US11782298B2 (en) | Illuminating device, imaging system, endoscope system including the imaging system, and microscope system including the imaging system | |
Yılmazlar et al. | Speckle noise reduction based on induced mode hopping in a semiconductor laser diode by drive current modulation | |
JPWO2007007389A1 (en) | Speckle removal light source and illumination device | |
US20190025666A1 (en) | Systems and Methods for Light Field Generation | |
JP5765032B2 (en) | Illumination device, projection device, and projection-type image display device | |
JP2011128639A (en) | Speckle removing light source and lighting device | |
RU2332694C1 (en) | Device for suppressing speckles (versions) | |
JP2014067041A (en) | Scanning device, irradiation device, illumination device and projection device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 17909721 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 17909721 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |